ANSIfy

18 files changed, 2885 insertions, 2917 deletions

diff --git a/generic/tkError.c b/generic/tkError.c
index 648d440..fe84fe3 100644
--- a/generic/tkError.c
+++ b/generic/tkError.c
@@ -1,106 +1,96 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkError.c --
  *
- *	This file provides a high-performance mechanism for
- *	selectively dealing with errors that occur in talking
- *	to the X server.  This is useful, for example, when
- *	communicating with a window that may not exist.
+ *	This file provides a high-performance mechanism for selectively
+ *	dealing with errors that occur in talking to the X server. This is
+ *	useful, for example, when communicating with a window that may not
+ *	exist.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkError.c,v 1.3 2004/01/13 02:06:00 davygrvy Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkError.c,v 1.4 2005/11/15 15:18:21 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
 /*
- * The default X error handler gets saved here, so that it can
- * be invoked if an error occurs that we can't handle.
+ * The default X error handler gets saved here, so that it can be invoked if
+ * an error occurs that we can't handle.
  */
 
-static int	(*defaultHandler) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-		    XErrorEvent *eventPtr)) = NULL;
-
+typedef int (*TkXErrorHandler)(Display *display, XErrorEvent *eventPtr);
+static TkXErrorHandler	defaultHandler = NULL;
 
 /*
  * Forward references to procedures declared later in this file:
  */
 
-static int	ErrorProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-		    XErrorEvent *errEventPtr));
+static int	ErrorProc(Display *display, XErrorEvent *errEventPtr);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_CreateErrorHandler --
  *
- *	Arrange for all a given procedure to be invoked whenever
- *	certain errors occur.
+ *	Arrange for all a given procedure to be invoked whenever certain
+ *	errors occur.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token identifying the handler;
- *	it must be passed to Tk_DeleteErrorHandler to delete the
- *	handler.
+ *	The return value is a token identifying the handler; it must be passed
+ *	to Tk_DeleteErrorHandler to delete the handler.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If an X error occurs that matches the error, request,
- *	and minor arguments, then errorProc will be invoked.
- *	ErrorProc should have the following structure:
+ *	If an X error occurs that matches the error, request, and minor
+ *	arguments, then errorProc will be invoked. ErrorProc should have the
+ *	following structure:
  *
  *	int
- *	errorProc(clientData, errorEventPtr)
- *	    caddr_t clientData;
- *	    XErrorEvent *errorEventPtr;
- *	{
+ *	errorProc(caddr_t clientData, XErrorEvent *errorEventPtr) {
  *	}
  *
- *	The clientData argument will be the same as the clientData
- *	argument to this procedure, and errorEvent will describe
- *	the error.  If errorProc returns 0, it means that it
- *	completely "handled" the error:  no further processing
- *	should be done.  If errorProc returns 1, it means that it
- *	didn't know how to deal with the error, so we should look
- *	for other error handlers, or invoke the default error
- *	handler if no other handler returns zero.  Handlers are
- *	invoked in order of age:  youngest handler first.
+ *	The clientData argument will be the same as the clientData argument to
+ *	this procedure, and errorEvent will describe the error. If errorProc
+ *	returns 0, it means that it completely "handled" the error: no further
+ *	processing should be done. If errorProc returns 1, it means that it
+ *	didn't know how to deal with the error, so we should look for other
+ *	error handlers, or invoke the default error handler if no other
+ *	handler returns zero. Handlers are invoked in order of age: youngest
+ *	handler first.
  *
- *	Note:  errorProc will only be called for errors associated
- *	with X requests made AFTER this call, but BEFORE the handler
- *	is deleted by calling Tk_DeleteErrorHandler.
+ *	Note: errorProc will only be called for errors associated with X
+ *	requests made AFTER this call, but BEFORE the handler is deleted by
+ *	calling Tk_DeleteErrorHandler.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_ErrorHandler
-Tk_CreateErrorHandler(display, error, request, minorCode, errorProc, clientData)
-    Display *display;		/* Display for which to handle
+Tk_CreateErrorHandler(
+    Display *display,		/* Display for which to handle errors. */
+    int error,			/* Consider only errors with this error_code
+				 * (-1 means consider all errors). */
+    int request,		/* Consider only errors with this major
+				 * request code (-1 means consider all major
+				 * codes). */
+    int minorCode,		/* Consider only errors with this minor
+				 * request code (-1 means consider all minor
+				 * codes). */
+    Tk_ErrorProc *errorProc,	/* Procedure to invoke when a matching error
+				 * occurs. NULL means just ignore matching
 				 * errors. */
-    int error;			/* Consider only errors with this
-				 * error_code (-1 means consider
-				 * all errors). */
-    int request;		/* Consider only errors with this
-				 * major request code (-1 means
-				 * consider all major codes). */
-    int minorCode;		/* Consider only errors with this
-				 * minor request code (-1 means
-				 * consider all minor codes). */
-    Tk_ErrorProc *errorProc;	/* Procedure to invoke when a
-				 * matching error occurs.  NULL means
-				 * just ignore matching errors. */
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Arbitrary value to pass to
-				 * errorProc. */
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Arbitrary value to pass to errorProc. */
 {
     register TkErrorHandler *errorPtr;
     register TkDisplay *dispPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Find the display.  If Tk doesn't know about this display then
-     * it's an error:  panic.
+     * Find the display. If Tk doesn't know about this display then it's an
+     * error: panic.
      */
 
     dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
@@ -146,22 +136,19 @@ Tk_CreateErrorHandler(display, error, request, minorCode, errorProc, clientData)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The handler denoted by the "handler" argument will not
- *	be invoked for any X errors associated with requests
- *	made after this call.  However, if errors arrive later
- *	for requests made BEFORE this call, then the handler
- *	will still be invoked.  Call XSync if you want to be
- *	sure that all outstanding errors have been received
- *	and processed.
+ *	The handler denoted by the "handler" argument will not be invoked for
+ *	any X errors associated with requests made after this call. However,
+ *	if errors arrive later for requests made BEFORE this call, then the
+ *	handler will still be invoked. Call XSync if you want to be sure that
+ *	all outstanding errors have been received and processed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler)
-    Tk_ErrorHandler handler;	/* Token for handler to delete;
-				 * was previous return value from
-				 * Tk_CreateErrorHandler. */
+Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(
+    Tk_ErrorHandler handler)	/* Token for handler to delete; was previous
+				 * return value from Tk_CreateErrorHandler. */
 {
     register TkErrorHandler *errorPtr = (TkErrorHandler *) handler;
     register TkDisplay *dispPtr = errorPtr->dispPtr;
@@ -169,17 +156,15 @@ Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler)
     errorPtr->lastRequest = NextRequest(dispPtr->display) - 1;
 
     /*
-     * Every once-in-a-while, cleanup handlers that are no longer
-     * active.  We probably won't be able to free the handler that
-     * was just deleted (need to wait for any outstanding requests to
-     * be processed by server), but there may be previously-deleted
-     * handlers that are now ready for garbage collection.  To reduce
-     * the cost of the cleanup, let a few dead handlers pile up, then
-     * clean them all at once.  This adds a bit of overhead to errors
-     * that might occur while the dead handlers are hanging around,
-     * but reduces the overhead of scanning the list to clean up
-     * (particularly if there are many handlers that stay around
-     * forever).
+     * Every once-in-a-while, cleanup handlers that are no longer active. We
+     * probably won't be able to free the handler that was just deleted (need
+     * to wait for any outstanding requests to be processed by server), but
+     * there may be previously-deleted handlers that are now ready for garbage
+     * collection. To reduce the cost of the cleanup, let a few dead handlers
+     * pile up, then clean them all at once. This adds a bit of overhead to
+     * errors that might occur while the dead handlers are hanging around, but
+     * reduces the overhead of scanning the list to clean up (particularly if
+     * there are many handlers that stay around forever).
      */
 
     dispPtr->deleteCount += 1;
@@ -213,35 +198,33 @@ Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler)
  *
  * ErrorProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the X system when error
- *	events arrive.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the X system when error events arrive.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If it returns, the return value is zero.  However,
- *	it is possible that one of the error handlers may
- *	just exit.
+ *	If it returns, the return value is zero. However, it is possible that
+ *	one of the error handlers may just exit.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	This procedure does two things.  First, it uses the
- *	serial #  in the error event to eliminate handlers whose
- *	expiration serials are now in the past.  Second, it
- *	invokes any handlers that want to deal with the error.
+ *	This procedure does two things. First, it uses the serial # in the
+ *	error event to eliminate handlers whose expiration serials are now in
+ *	the past. Second, it invokes any handlers that want to deal with the
+ *	error.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ErrorProc(display, errEventPtr)
-    Display *display;			/* Display for which error
-					 * occurred. */
-    register XErrorEvent *errEventPtr;	/* Information about error. */
+ErrorProc(
+    Display *display,		/* Display for which error occurred. */
+    register XErrorEvent *errEventPtr)
+				/* Information about error. */
 {
     register TkDisplay *dispPtr;
     register TkErrorHandler *errorPtr;
 
     /*
-     * See if we know anything about the display.  If not, then
-     * invoke the default error handler.
+     * See if we know anything about the display. If not, then invoke the
+     * default error handler.
      */
 
     dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
@@ -266,42 +249,47 @@ ErrorProc(display, errEventPtr)
 		    && (errorPtr->lastRequest < errEventPtr->serial))) {
 	    continue;
 	}
-	if (errorPtr->errorProc == NULL) {
+	if (errorPtr->errorProc == NULL || (*errorPtr->errorProc)(
+		errorPtr->clientData, errEventPtr) == 0) {
 	    return 0;
-	} else {
-	    if ((*errorPtr->errorProc)(errorPtr->clientData,
-		    errEventPtr) == 0) {
-		return 0;
-	    }
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * See if the error is a BadWindow error.  If so, and it refers
-     * to a window that still exists in our window table, then ignore
-     * the error.  Errors like this can occur if a window owned by us
-     * is deleted by someone externally, like a window manager.  We'll
-     * ignore the errors at least long enough to clean up internally and
-     * remove the entry from the window table.
+     * See if the error is a BadWindow error. If so, and it refers to a window
+     * that still exists in our window table, then ignore the error. Errors
+     * like this can occur if a window owned by us is deleted by someone
+     * externally, like a window manager. We'll ignore the errors at least
+     * long enough to clean up internally and remove the entry from the window
+     * table.
      *
-     * NOTE: For embedding, we must also check whether the window was
-     * recently deleted. If so, it may be that Tk generated operations on
-     * windows that were deleted by the container. Now we are getting
-     * the errors (BadWindow) after Tk already deleted the window itself.
+     * NOTE: For embedding, we must also check whether the window was recently
+     * deleted. If so, it may be that Tk generated operations on windows that
+     * were deleted by the container. Now we are getting the errors
+     * (BadWindow) after Tk already deleted the window itself.
      */
 
-    if ((errEventPtr->error_code == BadWindow) &&
-            ((Tk_IdToWindow(display, (Window) errEventPtr->resourceid) !=
-                    NULL) ||
-                (TkpWindowWasRecentlyDeleted((Window) errEventPtr->resourceid,
-                        dispPtr)))) {
-	return 0;
+    if (errEventPtr->error_code == BadWindow) {
+	Window w = (Window) errEventPtr->resourceid;
+
+	if (Tk_IdToWindow(display, w) != NULL
+		|| TkpWindowWasRecentlyDeleted(w, dispPtr)) {
+	    return 0;
+	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * We couldn't handle the error.  Use the default handler.
+     * We couldn't handle the error. Use the default handler.
      */
 
-    couldntHandle:
+  couldntHandle:
     return (*defaultHandler)(display, errEventPtr);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkFileFilter.h b/generic/tkFileFilter.h
index edcf96a..dad9772 100644
--- a/generic/tkFileFilter.h
+++ b/generic/tkFileFilter.h
@@ -1,15 +1,15 @@
 /*
  * tkFileFilter.h --
  *
- *	Declarations for the file filter processing routines needed by
- *	the file selection dialogs.
+ *	Declarations for the file filter processing routines needed by the
+ *	file selection dialogs.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkFileFilter.h,v 1.6 2004/12/20 10:34:20 vincentdarley Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkFileFilter.h,v 1.7 2005/11/15 15:18:21 dkf Exp $
  *
  */
 
@@ -24,65 +24,65 @@
 #endif
 
 typedef struct GlobPattern {
-    struct GlobPattern * next;		/* Chains to the next glob pattern
-					 * in a glob pattern list */
-    char * pattern;			/* String value of the pattern, such
-					 * as "*.txt" or "*.*"
-					 */
+    struct GlobPattern *next;	/* Chains to the next glob pattern in a glob
+				 * pattern list */
+    char *pattern;		/* String value of the pattern, such as
+				 * "*.txt" or "*.*" */
 } GlobPattern;
 
 typedef struct MacFileType {
-    struct MacFileType * next;		/* Chains to the next mac file type
-					 * in a mac file type list */
-    OSType type;			/* Mac file type, such as 'TEXT' or
-					 * 'GIFF' */
+    struct MacFileType *next;	/* Chains to the next mac file type in a mac
+				 * file type list */
+    OSType type;		/* Mac file type, such as 'TEXT' or 'GIFF' */
 } MacFileType;
 
 typedef struct FileFilterClause {
-    struct FileFilterClause * next;	/* Chains to the next clause in
-					 * a clause list */
-    GlobPattern * patterns;		/* Head of glob pattern type list */
-    GlobPattern * patternsTail;		/* Tail of glob pattern type list */
-    MacFileType * macTypes;		/* Head of mac file type list */
-    MacFileType * macTypesTail;		/* Tail of mac file type list */
+    struct FileFilterClause *next;
+				/* Chains to the next clause in a clause
+				 * list */
+    GlobPattern *patterns;	/* Head of glob pattern type list */
+    GlobPattern *patternsTail;	/* Tail of glob pattern type list */
+    MacFileType *macTypes;	/* Head of mac file type list */
+    MacFileType *macTypesTail;	/* Tail of mac file type list */
 } FileFilterClause;
 
 typedef struct FileFilter {
-    struct FileFilter * next;		/* Chains to the next filter
-					 * in a filter list */
-    char * name;			/* Name of the file filter,
-					 * such as "Text Documents" */
-    FileFilterClause * clauses;		/* Head of the clauses list */
-    FileFilterClause * clausesTail;	/* Tail of the clauses list */
+    struct FileFilter *next;	/* Chains to the next filter in a filter
+				 * list */
+    char *name;			/* Name of the file filter, such as "Text
+				 * Documents" */
+    FileFilterClause *clauses;	/* Head of the clauses list */
+    FileFilterClause *clausesTail;
+				/* Tail of the clauses list */
 } FileFilter;
 
-/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * FileFilterList --
  *
- * The routine TkGetFileFilters() translates the string value of the
- * -filefilters option into a FileFilterList structure, which consists
- * of a list of file filters.
+ *	The routine TkGetFileFilters() translates the string value of the
+ *	-filefilters option into a FileFilterList structure, which consists of
+ *	a list of file filters.
+ *
+ *	Each file filter consists of one or more clauses. Each clause has one
+ *	or more glob patterns and/or one or more Mac file types
  *
- * Each file filter consists of one or more clauses. Each clause has
- * one or more glob patterns and/or one or more Mac file types
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 typedef struct FileFilterList {
-    FileFilter * filters;		/* Head of the filter list */
-    FileFilter * filtersTail;		/* Tail of the filter list */
-    int numFilters;			/* number of filters in the list */
+    FileFilter *filters;	/* Head of the filter list */
+    FileFilter *filtersTail;	/* Tail of the filter list */
+    int numFilters;		/* number of filters in the list */
 } FileFilterList;
 
-EXTERN void		TkFreeFileFilters _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    FileFilterList * flistPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkInitFileFilters _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    FileFilterList * flistPtr));
-EXTERN int		TkGetFileFilters _ANSI_ARGS_ ((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-    			    FileFilterList * flistPtr, Tcl_Obj *valuePtr,
-			    int isWindows));
+EXTERN void		TkFreeFileFilters(FileFilterList *flistPtr);
+EXTERN void		TkInitFileFilters(FileFilterList *flistPtr);
+EXTERN int		TkGetFileFilters(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    			    FileFilterList *flistPtr, Tcl_Obj *valuePtr,
+			    int isWindows);
 
 # undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
 # define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
-
 #endif
diff --git a/generic/tkImgBmap.c b/generic/tkImgBmap.c
index b5e77c0..26322c9 100644
--- a/generic/tkImgBmap.c
+++ b/generic/tkImgBmap.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkImgBmap.c --
  *
  *	This procedure implements images of type "bitmap" for Tk.
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
  * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
  * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkImgBmap.c,v 1.16 2004/01/13 02:06:00 davygrvy Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkImgBmap.c,v 1.17 2005/11/15 15:18:21 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
@@ -22,21 +22,19 @@
  */
 
 typedef struct BitmapMaster {
-    Tk_ImageMaster tkMaster;	/* Tk's token for image master.  NULL means
-				 * the image is being deleted. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for application that is
-				 * using image. */
-    Tcl_Command imageCmd;	/* Token for image command (used to delete
-				 * it when the image goes away).  NULL means
-				 * the image command has already been
-				 * deleted. */
+    Tk_ImageMaster tkMaster;	/* Tk's token for image master. NULL means the
+				 * image is being deleted. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for application that is using
+				 * image. */
+    Tcl_Command imageCmd;	/* Token for image command (used to delete it
+				 * when the image goes away). NULL means the
+				 * image command has already been deleted. */
     int width, height;		/* Dimensions of image. */
-    char *data;			/* Data comprising bitmap (suitable for
-				 * input to XCreateBitmapFromData).   May
-				 * be NULL if no data.  Malloc'ed. */
-    char *maskData;		/* Data for bitmap's mask (suitable for
-				 * input to XCreateBitmapFromData).
-				 * Malloc'ed. */
+    char *data;			/* Data comprising bitmap (suitable for input
+				 * to XCreateBitmapFromData). May be NULL if
+				 * no data. Malloc'ed. */
+    char *maskData;		/* Data for bitmap's mask (suitable for input
+				 * to XCreateBitmapFromData). Malloc'ed. */
     Tk_Uid fgUid;		/* Value of -foreground option (malloc'ed). */
     Tk_Uid bgUid;		/* Value of -background option (malloc'ed). */
     char *fileString;		/* Value of -file option (malloc'ed). */
@@ -49,13 +47,13 @@ typedef struct BitmapMaster {
 } BitmapMaster;
 
 /*
- * The following data structure represents all of the instances of an
- * image that lie within a particular window:
+ * The following data structure represents all of the instances of an image
+ * that lie within a particular window:
  */
 
 typedef struct BitmapInstance {
-    int refCount;		/* Number of instances that share this
-				 * data structure. */
+    int refCount;		/* Number of instances that share this data
+				 * structure. */
     BitmapMaster *masterPtr;	/* Pointer to master for image. */
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which the instances will be
 				 * displayed. */
@@ -65,37 +63,35 @@ typedef struct BitmapInstance {
     Pixmap mask;		/* Mask: only display bitmap pixels where
 				 * there are 1's here. */
     GC gc;			/* Graphics context for displaying bitmap.
-				 * None means there was an error while
-				 * setting up the instance, so it cannot
-				 * be displayed. */
+				 * None means there was an error while setting
+				 * up the instance, so it cannot be
+				 * displayed. */
     struct BitmapInstance *nextPtr;
 				/* Next in list of all instance structures
-				 * associated with masterPtr (NULL means
-				 * end of list). */
+				 * associated with masterPtr (NULL means end
+				 * of list). */
 } BitmapInstance;
 
 /*
  * The type record for bitmap images:
  */
 
-static int		GetByte _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Channel chan));
-static int		ImgBmapCreate _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+static int		GetByte(Tcl_Channel chan);
+static int		ImgBmapCreate(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    char *name, int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],
 			    Tk_ImageType *typePtr, Tk_ImageMaster master,
-			    ClientData *clientDataPtr));
-static ClientData	ImgBmapGet _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		ImgBmapDisplay _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Display *display, Drawable drawable, 
+			    ClientData *clientDataPtr);
+static ClientData	ImgBmapGet(Tk_Window tkwin, ClientData clientData);
+static void		ImgBmapDisplay(ClientData clientData,
+			    Display *display, Drawable drawable,
 			    int imageX, int imageY, int width, int height,
-			    int drawableX, int drawableY));
-static void		ImgBmapFree _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Display *display));
-static void		ImgBmapDelete _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static int		ImgBmapPostscript _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    int drawableX, int drawableY);
+static void		ImgBmapFree(ClientData clientData, Display *display);
+static void		ImgBmapDelete(ClientData clientData);
+static int		ImgBmapPostscript(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    Tk_PostscriptInfo psinfo, int x, int y,
-			    int width, int height, int prepass));
+			    int width, int height, int prepass);
 
 Tk_ImageType tkBitmapImageType = {
     "bitmap",			/* name */
@@ -105,7 +101,7 @@ Tk_ImageType tkBitmapImageType = {
     ImgBmapFree,		/* freeProc */
     ImgBmapDelete,		/* deleteProc */
     ImgBmapPostscript,		/* postscriptProc */
-    (Tk_ImageType *) NULL	/* nextPtr */
+    NULL			/* nextPtr */
 };
 
 /*
@@ -113,28 +109,25 @@ Tk_ImageType tkBitmapImageType = {
  */
 
 static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_CONFIG_UID, "-background", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_UID, "-background", NULL, NULL,
 	"", Tk_Offset(BitmapMaster, bgUid), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-data", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapMaster, dataString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-file", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapMaster, fileString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_UID, "-foreground", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-data", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapMaster, dataString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-file", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapMaster, fileString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_UID, "-foreground", NULL, NULL,
 	"#000000", Tk_Offset(BitmapMaster, fgUid), 0},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-maskdata", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapMaster, maskDataString),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-maskfile", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapMaster, maskFileString),
-	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
-    {TK_CONFIG_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0}
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-maskdata", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapMaster, maskDataString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-maskfile", NULL, NULL,
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(BitmapMaster, maskFileString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+    {TK_CONFIG_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
- * The following data structure is used to describe the state of
- * parsing a bitmap file or string.  It is used for communication
- * between TkGetBitmapData and NextBitmapWord.
+ * The following data structure is used to describe the state of parsing a
+ * bitmap file or string. It is used for communication between TkGetBitmapData
+ * and NextBitmapWord.
  */
 
 #define MAX_WORD_LENGTH 100
@@ -142,8 +135,8 @@ typedef struct ParseInfo {
     char *string;		/* Next character of string data for bitmap,
 				 * or NULL if bitmap is being read from
 				 * file. */
-    Tcl_Channel chan;		/* File containing bitmap data, or NULL
-				 * if no file. */
+    Tcl_Channel chan;		/* File containing bitmap data, or NULL if no
+				 * file. */
     char word[MAX_WORD_LENGTH+1];
 				/* Current word of bitmap data, NULL
 				 * terminated. */
@@ -154,24 +147,20 @@ typedef struct ParseInfo {
  * Prototypes for procedures used only locally in this file:
  */
 
-static int		ImgBmapCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		ImgBmapCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		ImgBmapConfigureInstance _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    BitmapInstance *instancePtr));
-static int		ImgBmapConfigureMaster _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    BitmapMaster *masterPtr, int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],
-			    int flags));
-static int		NextBitmapWord _ANSI_ARGS_((ParseInfo *parseInfoPtr));
+static int		ImgBmapCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		ImgBmapCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		ImgBmapConfigureInstance(BitmapInstance *instancePtr);
+static int		ImgBmapConfigureMaster(BitmapMaster *masterPtr,
+			    int argc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags);
+static int		NextBitmapWord(ParseInfo *parseInfoPtr);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * ImgBmapCreate --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by the Tk image code to create "test"
- *	images.
+ *	This procedure is called by the Tk image code to create "test" images.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -184,18 +173,18 @@ static int		NextBitmapWord _ANSI_ARGS_((ParseInfo *parseInfoPtr));
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
-ImgBmapCreate(interp, name, argc, argv, typePtr, master, clientDataPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for application containing
+ImgBmapCreate(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for application containing
 				 * image. */
-    char *name;			/* Name to use for image. */
-    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST argv[];	/* Argument objects for options (doesn't
+    char *name,			/* Name to use for image. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST argv[],	/* Argument objects for options (doesn't
 				 * include image name or type). */
-    Tk_ImageType *typePtr;	/* Pointer to our type record (not used). */
-    Tk_ImageMaster master;	/* Token for image, to be used by us in
-				 * later callbacks. */
-    ClientData *clientDataPtr;	/* Store manager's token for image here;
-				 * it will be returned in later callbacks. */
+    Tk_ImageType *typePtr,	/* Pointer to our type record (not used). */
+    Tk_ImageMaster master,	/* Token for image, to be used by us in later
+				 * callbacks. */
+    ClientData *clientDataPtr)	/* Store manager's token for image here; it
+				 * will be returned in later callbacks. */
 {
     BitmapMaster *masterPtr;
 
@@ -228,28 +217,28 @@ ImgBmapCreate(interp, name, argc, argv, typePtr, master, clientDataPtr)
  * ImgBmapConfigureMaster --
  *
  *	This procedure is called when a bitmap image is created or
- *	reconfigured.  It process configuration options and resets
- *	any instances of the image.
+ *	reconfigured. It process configuration options and resets any
+ *	instances of the image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.  If TCL_ERROR is returned then
- *	an error message is left in the masterPtr->interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl return value. If TCL_ERROR is returned then an error
+ *	message is left in the masterPtr->interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Existing instances of the image will be redisplayed to match
- *	the new configuration options.
+ *	Existing instances of the image will be redisplayed to match the new
+ *	configuration options.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ImgBmapConfigureMaster(masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
-    BitmapMaster *masterPtr;	/* Pointer to data structure describing
+ImgBmapConfigureMaster(
+    BitmapMaster *masterPtr,	/* Pointer to data structure describing
 				 * overall bitmap image to (reconfigure). */
-    int objc;			/* Number of entries in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Pairs of configuration options for image. */
-    int flags;			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget,
-				 * such as TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of entries in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],	/* Pairs of configuration options for image. */
+    int flags)			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget, such
+				 * as TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY. */
 {
     BitmapInstance *instancePtr;
     int maskWidth, maskHeight, dummy1, dummy2;
@@ -269,8 +258,8 @@ ImgBmapConfigureMaster(masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     ckfree((char *) argv);
 
     /*
-     * Parse the bitmap and/or mask to create binary data.  Make sure that
-     * the bitmap and mask have the same dimensions.
+     * Parse the bitmap and/or mask to create binary data. Make sure that the
+     * bitmap and mask have the same dimensions.
      */
 
     if (masterPtr->data != NULL) {
@@ -313,9 +302,9 @@ ImgBmapConfigureMaster(masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Cycle through all of the instances of this image, regenerating
-     * the information for each instance.  Then force the image to be
-     * redisplayed everywhere that it is used.
+     * Cycle through all of the instances of this image, regenerating the
+     * information for each instance. Then force the image to be redisplayed
+     * everywhere that it is used.
      */
 
     for (instancePtr = masterPtr->instancePtr; instancePtr != NULL;
@@ -332,24 +321,24 @@ ImgBmapConfigureMaster(masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  *
  * ImgBmapConfigureInstance --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to create displaying information for
- *	a bitmap image instance based on the configuration information
- *	in the master.  It is invoked both when new instances are
- *	created and when the master is reconfigured.
+ *	This procedure is called to create displaying information for a bitmap
+ *	image instance based on the configuration information in the master.
+ *	It is invoked both when new instances are created and when the master
+ *	is reconfigured.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Generates errors via Tcl_BackgroundError if there are problems
- *	in setting up the instance.
+ *	Generates errors via Tcl_BackgroundError if there are problems in
+ *	setting up the instance.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ImgBmapConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
-    BitmapInstance *instancePtr;	/* Instance to reconfigure. */
+ImgBmapConfigureInstance(
+    BitmapInstance *instancePtr)/* Instance to reconfigure. */
 {
     BitmapMaster *masterPtr = instancePtr->masterPtr;
     XColor *colorPtr;
@@ -359,8 +348,8 @@ ImgBmapConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
     Pixmap oldMask;
 
     /*
-     * For each of the options in masterPtr, translate the string
-     * form into an internal form appropriate for instancePtr.
+     * For each of the options in masterPtr, translate the string form into an
+     * internal form appropriate for instancePtr.
      */
 
     if (*masterPtr->bgUid != 0) {
@@ -400,11 +389,12 @@ ImgBmapConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Careful:  We have to allocate a new mask Pixmap before deleting
-     * the old one.  Otherwise, The XID allocator will always return
-     * the same XID for the new Pixmap as was used for the old Pixmap.
-     * And that will prevent the mask from changing in the GC below.
+     * Careful: We have to allocate a new mask Pixmap before deleting the old
+     * one. Otherwise, The XID allocator will always return the same XID for
+     * the new Pixmap as was used for the old Pixmap. And that will prevent
+     * the mask from changing in the GC below.
      */
+
     oldMask = instancePtr->mask;
     instancePtr->mask = None;
     if (masterPtr->maskData != NULL) {
@@ -415,7 +405,7 @@ ImgBmapConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
 		(unsigned) masterPtr->height);
     }
     if (oldMask != None) {
-      Tk_FreePixmap(Tk_Display(instancePtr->tkwin), oldMask);
+	Tk_FreePixmap(Tk_Display(instancePtr->tkwin), oldMask);
     }
 
     if (masterPtr->data != NULL) {
@@ -443,11 +433,10 @@ ImgBmapConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
     instancePtr->gc = gc;
     return;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     /*
-     * An error occurred: clear the graphics context in the instance to
-     * make it clear that this instance cannot be displayed.  Then report
-     * the error.
+     * An error occurred: clear the graphics context in the instance to make
+     * it clear that this instance cannot be displayed. Then report the error.
      */
 
     if (instancePtr->gc != None) {
@@ -465,17 +454,16 @@ ImgBmapConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
  *
  * TkGetBitmapData --
  *
- *	Given a file name or ASCII string, this procedure parses the
- *	file or string contents to produce binary data for a bitmap.
+ *	Given a file name or ASCII string, this procedure parses the file or
+ *	string contents to produce binary data for a bitmap.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If the bitmap description was parsed successfully then the
- *	return value is a malloc-ed array containing the bitmap data.
- *	The dimensions of the data are stored in *widthPtr and
- *	*heightPtr.  *hotXPtr and *hotYPtr are set to the bitmap
- *	hotspot if one is defined, otherwise they are set to -1, -1.
- *	If an error occurred, NULL is returned and an error message is
- *	left in the interp's result.
+ *	If the bitmap description was parsed successfully then the return
+ *	value is a malloc-ed array containing the bitmap data. The dimensions
+ *	of the data are stored in *widthPtr and *heightPtr. *hotXPtr and
+ *	*hotYPtr are set to the bitmap hotspot if one is defined, otherwise
+ *	they are set to -1, -1. If an error occurred, NULL is returned and an
+ *	error message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	A bitmap is created.
@@ -484,18 +472,15 @@ ImgBmapConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
  */
 
 char *
-TkGetBitmapData(interp, string, fileName, widthPtr, heightPtr,
-	hotXPtr, hotYPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* For reporting errors, or NULL. */
-    char *string;			/* String describing bitmap.  May
-					 * be NULL. */
-    char *fileName;			/* Name of file containing bitmap
-					 * description.  Used only if string
-					 * is NULL.  Must not be NULL if
-					 * string is NULL. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;		/* Dimensions of bitmap get returned
-					 * here. */
-    int *hotXPtr, *hotYPtr;		/* Position of hot spot or -1,-1. */
+TkGetBitmapData(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* For reporting errors, or NULL. */
+    char *string,		/* String describing bitmap. May be NULL. */
+    char *fileName,		/* Name of file containing bitmap description.
+				 * Used only if string is NULL. Must not be
+				 * NULL if string is NULL. */
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
+				/* Dimensions of bitmap get returned here. */
+    int *hotXPtr, int *hotYPtr)	/* Position of hot spot or -1,-1. */
 {
     int width, height, numBytes, hotX, hotY;
     CONST char *expandedFileName;
@@ -506,11 +491,11 @@ TkGetBitmapData(interp, string, fileName, widthPtr, heightPtr,
 
     pi.string = string;
     if (string == NULL) {
-        if ((interp != NULL) && Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
-            Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't get bitmap data from a file in a",
-                    " safe interpreter", (char *) NULL);
-            return NULL;
-        }
+	if ((interp != NULL) && Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't get bitmap data from a file in a",
+		    " safe interpreter", NULL);
+	    return NULL;
+	}
 	expandedFileName = Tcl_TranslateFileName(interp, fileName, &buffer);
 	if (expandedFileName == NULL) {
 	    return NULL;
@@ -521,29 +506,28 @@ TkGetBitmapData(interp, string, fileName, widthPtr, heightPtr,
 	    if (interp != NULL) {
 		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "couldn't read bitmap file \"",
-			fileName, "\": ", Tcl_PosixError(interp),
-			(char *) NULL);
+			fileName, "\": ", Tcl_PosixError(interp), NULL);
 	    }
 	    return NULL;
 	}
-	
-        if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, pi.chan, "-translation", "binary")
+
+	if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, pi.chan, "-translation", "binary")
 		!= TCL_OK) {
-            return NULL;
-        }
-        if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, pi.chan, "-encoding", "binary")
+	    return NULL;
+	}
+	if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, pi.chan, "-encoding", "binary")
 		!= TCL_OK) {
-            return NULL;
-        }
+	    return NULL;
+	}
     } else {
 	pi.chan = NULL;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Parse the lines that define the dimensions of the bitmap,
-     * plus the first line that defines the bitmap data (it declares
-     * the name of a data variable but doesn't include any actual
-     * data).  These lines look something like the following:
+     * Parse the lines that define the dimensions of the bitmap, plus the
+     * first line that defines the bitmap data (it declares the name of a data
+     * variable but doesn't include any actual data). These lines look
+     * something like the following:
      *
      *		#define foo_width 16
      *		#define foo_height 16
@@ -551,9 +535,9 @@ TkGetBitmapData(interp, string, fileName, widthPtr, heightPtr,
      *		#define foo_y_hot 3
      *		static char foo_bits[] = {
      *
-     * The x_hot and y_hot lines may or may not be present.  It's
-     * important to check for "char" in the last line, in order to
-     * reject old X10-style bitmaps that used shorts.
+     * The x_hot and y_hot lines may or may not be present. It's important to
+     * check for "char" in the last line, in order to reject old X10-style
+     * bitmaps that used shorts.
      */
 
     width = 0;
@@ -612,19 +596,18 @@ TkGetBitmapData(interp, string, fileName, widthPtr, heightPtr,
 	} else if ((pi.word[0] == '{') && (pi.word[1] == 0)) {
 	    if (interp != NULL) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "format error in bitmap data; ",
-			"looks like it's an obsolete X10 bitmap file",
-			(char *) NULL);
+			"looks like it's an obsolete X10 bitmap file", NULL);
 	    }
 	    goto errorCleanup;
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Now we've read everything but the data.  Allocate an array
-     * and read in the data.
+     * Now we've read everything but the data. Allocate an array and read in
+     * the data.
      */
 
-    getData:
+  getData:
     if ((width <= 0) || (height <= 0)) {
 	goto error;
     }
@@ -641,7 +624,7 @@ TkGetBitmapData(interp, string, fileName, widthPtr, heightPtr,
     }
 
     /*
-     * All done.  Clean up and return.
+     * All done. Clean up and return.
      */
 
     if (pi.chan != NULL) {
@@ -653,12 +636,12 @@ TkGetBitmapData(interp, string, fileName, widthPtr, heightPtr,
     *hotYPtr = hotY;
     return data;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     if (interp != NULL) {
 	Tcl_SetResult(interp, "format error in bitmap data", TCL_STATIC);
     }
-    
-    errorCleanup:
+
+  errorCleanup:
     if (data != NULL) {
 	ckfree(data);
     }
@@ -673,13 +656,13 @@ TkGetBitmapData(interp, string, fileName, widthPtr, heightPtr,
  *
  * NextBitmapWord --
  *
- *	This procedure retrieves the next word of information (stuff
- *	between commas or white space) from a bitmap description.
+ *	This procedure retrieves the next word of information (stuff between
+ *	commas or white space) from a bitmap description.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns TCL_OK if all went well.  In this case the next word,
- *	and its length, will be availble in *parseInfoPtr.  If the end
- *	of the bitmap description was reached then TCL_ERROR is returned.
+ *	Returns TCL_OK if all went well. In this case the next word, and its
+ *	length, will be availble in *parseInfoPtr. If the end of the bitmap
+ *	description was reached then TCL_ERROR is returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -688,9 +671,9 @@ TkGetBitmapData(interp, string, fileName, widthPtr, heightPtr,
  */
 
 static int
-NextBitmapWord(parseInfoPtr)
-    ParseInfo *parseInfoPtr;		/* Describes what we're reading
-					 * and where we are in it. */
+NextBitmapWord(
+    ParseInfo *parseInfoPtr)	/* Describes what we're reading and where we
+				 * are in it. */
 {
     char *src, *dst;
     int c;
@@ -742,9 +725,9 @@ NextBitmapWord(parseInfoPtr)
  *
  * ImgBmapCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to an image managed by this module.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to an image managed by this module. See the user documentation for
+ *	details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -756,15 +739,15 @@ NextBitmapWord(parseInfoPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-ImgBmapCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about the image master. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+ImgBmapCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about the image master. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
-    static CONST char *bmapOptions[] = {"cget", "configure", (char *) NULL};
+    static CONST char *bmapOptions[] = {"cget", "configure", NULL};
     BitmapMaster *masterPtr = (BitmapMaster *) clientData;
-    int code, index;
+    int index;
 
     if (objc < 2) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
@@ -775,33 +758,29 @@ ImgBmapCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     switch (index) {
-      case 0: {
+    case 0: /* cget */
 	if (objc != 3) {
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	return Tk_ConfigureValue(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp), configSpecs,
 		(char *) masterPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 0);
-      }
-      case 1: {
+    case 1: /* configure */
 	if (objc == 2) {
-	    code = Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
-		    configSpecs, (char *) masterPtr, (char *) NULL, 0);
+	    return Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
+		    configSpecs, (char *) masterPtr, NULL, 0);
 	} else if (objc == 3) {
-	    code = Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
+	    return Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
 		    configSpecs, (char *) masterPtr,
 		    Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 0);
 	} else {
-	    code = ImgBmapConfigureMaster(masterPtr, objc-2, objv+2,
+	    return ImgBmapConfigureMaster(masterPtr, objc-2, objv+2,
 		    TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY);
 	}
-	return code;
-      }
-      default: {
+    default:
 	Tcl_Panic("bad const entries to bmapOptions in ImgBmapCmd");
-      }
+	return TCL_OK;
     }
-    return TCL_OK;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -809,33 +788,32 @@ ImgBmapCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * ImgBmapGet --
  *
- *	This procedure is called for each use of a bitmap image in a
- *	widget.
+ *	This procedure is called for each use of a bitmap image in a widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for the instance, which is passed
- *	back to us in calls to ImgBmapDisplay and ImgBmapFree.
+ *	The return value is a token for the instance, which is passed back to
+ *	us in calls to ImgBmapDisplay and ImgBmapFree.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A data structure is set up for the instance (or, an existing
- *	instance is re-used for the new one).
+ *	A data structure is set up for the instance (or, an existing instance
+ *	is re-used for the new one).
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static ClientData
-ImgBmapGet(tkwin, masterData)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which the instance will be
+ImgBmapGet(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which the instance will be
 				 * used. */
-    ClientData masterData;	/* Pointer to our master structure for the
+    ClientData masterData)	/* Pointer to our master structure for the
 				 * image. */
 {
     BitmapMaster *masterPtr = (BitmapMaster *) masterData;
     BitmapInstance *instancePtr;
 
     /*
-     * See if there is already an instance for this window.  If so
-     * then just re-use it.
+     * See if there is already an instance for this window. If so then just
+     * re-use it.
      */
 
     for (instancePtr = masterPtr->instancePtr; instancePtr != NULL;
@@ -847,8 +825,8 @@ ImgBmapGet(tkwin, masterData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The image isn't already in use in this window.  Make a new
-     * instance of the image.
+     * The image isn't already in use in this window. Make a new instance of
+     * the image.
      */
 
     instancePtr = (BitmapInstance *) ckalloc(sizeof(BitmapInstance));
@@ -893,24 +871,24 @@ ImgBmapGet(tkwin, masterData)
  */
 
 static void
-ImgBmapDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width,
-	height, drawableX, drawableY)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to BitmapInstance structure for
-				 * for instance to be displayed. */
-    Display *display;		/* Display on which to draw image. */
-    Drawable drawable;		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw image. */
-    int imageX, imageY;		/* Upper-left corner of region within image
-				 * to draw. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of region within image to draw. */
-    int drawableX, drawableY;	/* Coordinates within drawable that
-				 * correspond to imageX and imageY. */
+ImgBmapDisplay(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to BitmapInstance structure for
+				 * instance to be displayed. */
+    Display *display,		/* Display on which to draw image. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw image. */
+    int imageX, int imageY,	/* Upper-left corner of region within image to
+				 * draw. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of region within image to draw. */
+    int drawableX, int drawableY)
+				/* Coordinates within drawable that correspond
+				 * to imageX and imageY. */
 {
     BitmapInstance *instancePtr = (BitmapInstance *) clientData;
     int masking;
 
     /*
-     * If there's no graphics context, it means that an error occurred
-     * while creating the image instance so it can't be displayed.
+     * If there's no graphics context, it means that an error occurred while
+     * creating the image instance so it can't be displayed.
      */
 
     if (instancePtr->gc == None) {
@@ -918,10 +896,9 @@ ImgBmapDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width,
     }
 
     /*
-     * If masking is in effect, must modify the mask origin within
-     * the graphics context to line up with the image's origin.
-     * Then draw the image and reset the clip origin, if there's
-     * a mask.
+     * If masking is in effect, must modify the mask origin within the
+     * graphics context to line up with the image's origin. Then draw the
+     * image and reset the clip origin, if there's a mask.
      */
 
     masking = (instancePtr->mask != None) || (instancePtr->bg == NULL);
@@ -942,8 +919,8 @@ ImgBmapDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width,
  *
  * ImgBmapFree --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when a widget ceases to use a
- *	particular instance of an image.
+ *	This procedure is called when a widget ceases to use a particular
+ *	instance of an image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -955,10 +932,10 @@ ImgBmapDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width,
  */
 
 static void
-ImgBmapFree(clientData, display)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to BitmapInstance structure for
-				 * for instance to be displayed. */
-    Display *display;		/* Display containing window that used image. */
+ImgBmapFree(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to BitmapInstance structure for
+				 * instance to be displayed. */
+    Display *display)		/* Display containing window that used image. */
 {
     BitmapInstance *instancePtr = (BitmapInstance *) clientData;
     BitmapInstance *prevPtr;
@@ -969,8 +946,8 @@ ImgBmapFree(clientData, display)
     }
 
     /*
-     * There are no more uses of the image within this widget.  Free
-     * the instance structure.
+     * There are no more uses of the image within this widget. Free the
+     * instance structure.
      */
 
     if (instancePtr->fg != NULL) {
@@ -1005,8 +982,8 @@ ImgBmapFree(clientData, display)
  *
  * ImgBmapDelete --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by the image code to delete the
- *	master structure for an image.
+ *	This procedure is called by the image code to delete the master
+ *	structure for an image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1018,9 +995,9 @@ ImgBmapFree(clientData, display)
  */
 
 static void
-ImgBmapDelete(masterData)
-    ClientData masterData;	/* Pointer to BitmapMaster structure for
-				 * image.  Must not have any more instances. */
+ImgBmapDelete(
+    ClientData masterData)	/* Pointer to BitmapMaster structure for
+				 * image. Must not have any more instances. */
 {
     BitmapMaster *masterPtr = (BitmapMaster *) masterData;
 
@@ -1037,7 +1014,7 @@ ImgBmapDelete(masterData)
     if (masterPtr->maskData != NULL) {
 	ckfree(masterPtr->maskData);
     }
-    Tk_FreeOptions(configSpecs, (char *) masterPtr, (Display *) NULL, 0);
+    Tk_FreeOptions(configSpecs, (char *) masterPtr, NULL, 0);
     ckfree((char *) masterPtr);
 }
 
@@ -1046,8 +1023,8 @@ ImgBmapDelete(masterData)
  *
  * ImgBmapCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when the image command for an image
- *	is deleted.  It deletes the image.
+ *	This procedure is invoked when the image command for an image is
+ *	deleted. It deletes the image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1059,8 +1036,8 @@ ImgBmapDelete(masterData)
  */
 
 static void
-ImgBmapCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to BitmapMaster structure for
+ImgBmapCmdDeletedProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to BitmapMaster structure for
 				 * image. */
 {
     BitmapMaster *masterPtr = (BitmapMaster *) clientData;
@@ -1088,8 +1065,8 @@ ImgBmapCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  */
 
 static int
-GetByte(chan)
-    Tcl_Channel chan;	/* The channel we read from. */
+GetByte(
+    Tcl_Channel chan)	/* The channel we read from. */
 {
     char buffer;
     int size;
@@ -1108,29 +1085,28 @@ GetByte(chan)
  *
  * ImgBmapPsImagemask --
  *
- *	This procedure generates postscript suitable for rendering a
- *      single bitmap of an image.  A single bitmap image might contain both
- *      a foreground and a background bitmap.  This routine is called once
- *      for each such bitmap in a bitmap image.
+ *	This procedure generates postscript suitable for rendering a single
+ *	bitmap of an image. A single bitmap image might contain both a
+ *	foreground and a background bitmap. This routine is called once for
+ *	each such bitmap in a bitmap image.
  *
- *      Prior to invoking this routine, the following setup has occurred:
+ *	Prior to invoking this routine, the following setup has occurred:
  *
- *	   1.  The postscript foreground color has been set to the color
- *	       used to render the bitmap.
+ *	   1.  The postscript foreground color has been set to the color used
+ *	       to render the bitmap.
  *
- *	   2.  The origin of the postscript coordinate system is set to
- *             the lower left corner of the bitmap.
+ *	   2.  The origin of the postscript coordinate system is set to the
+ *	       lower left corner of the bitmap.
  *
- *	   3.  The postscript coordinate system has been scaled so that
- *	       the entire bitmap is one unit squared.
+ *	   3.  The postscript coordinate system has been scaled so that the
+ *	       entire bitmap is one unit squared.
  *
- * 	Some postscript implementations cannot handle bitmap strings
- *	longer than about 60k characters.  If the bitmap data is that big
- *	or bigger, then we render it by splitting it into several smaller
- *	bitmaps.
+ *	Some postscript implementations cannot handle bitmap strings longer
+ *	than about 60k characters. If the bitmap data is that big or bigger,
+ *	then we render it by splitting it into several smaller bitmaps.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns TCL_OK on success.  Returns TCL_ERROR and leaves and error
+ *	Returns TCL_OK on success. Returns TCL_ERROR and leaves and error
  *	message in interp->result if there is a problem.
  *
  * Side effects:
@@ -1140,21 +1116,22 @@ GetByte(chan)
  */
 
 static int
-ImgBmapPsImagemask(interp, width, height, data)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;       /* Append postscript to this interpreter */
-    int width, height;        /* Width and height of the bitmap in pixels */
-    char *data;               /* Data for the bitmap */
+ImgBmapPsImagemask(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Append postscript to this interpreter */
+    int width, int height,	/* Width and height of the bitmap in pixels */
+    char *data)			/* Data for the bitmap */
 {
     int i, j, nBytePerRow;
     char buffer[200];
 
-    /* 
+    /*
      * The bit order of bitmaps in Tk is the opposite of the bit order that
-     * postscript uses.  (In Tk, the least significant bit is on the right
-     * side of the bitmap and in postscript the least significant bit is shown
-     * on the left.)  The following array is used to reverse the order of bits
+     * postscript uses. (In Tk, the least significant bit is on the right side
+     * of the bitmap and in postscript the least significant bit is shown on
+     * the left.) The following array is used to reverse the order of bits
      * within a byte so that the bits will be in the order postscript expects.
      */
+
     static unsigned char bit_reverse[] = {
        0, 128, 64, 192, 32, 160,  96, 224, 16, 144, 80, 208, 48, 176, 112, 240,
        8, 136, 72, 200, 40, 168, 104, 232, 24, 152, 88, 216, 56, 184, 120, 248,
@@ -1177,21 +1154,25 @@ ImgBmapPsImagemask(interp, width, height, data)
     if (width*height > 60000) {
 	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unable to generate postscript for bitmaps "
-		"larger than 60000 pixels", 0);
+		"larger than 60000 pixels", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
+
     sprintf(buffer, "0 0 moveto %d %d true [%d 0 0 %d 0 %d] {<\n",
-      width, height, width, -height, height);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, 0);
+	    width, height, width, -height, height);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+
     nBytePerRow = (width+7)/8;
     for(i=0; i<height; i++){
-      for(j=0; j<nBytePerRow; j++){
-        sprintf(buffer, " %02x", bit_reverse[0xff & data[i*nBytePerRow + j]]);
-        Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, 0);
-      }
-      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", 0);
+	for(j=0; j<nBytePerRow; j++){
+	    sprintf(buffer, " %02x",
+		    bit_reverse[0xff & data[i*nBytePerRow + j]]);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
+	}
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\n", NULL);
     }
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ">} imagemask \n", 0);
+
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, ">} imagemask \n", NULL);
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
@@ -1203,9 +1184,10 @@ ImgBmapPsImagemask(interp, width, height, data)
  *	This procedure generates postscript for rendering a bitmap image.
  *
  * Results:
+
  *	On success, this routine writes postscript code into interp->result
- *      and returns TCL_OK  TCL_ERROR is returned and an error
- *      message is left in interp->result if anything goes wrong.
+ *	and returns TCL_OK TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is left
+ *	in interp->result if anything goes wrong.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1214,13 +1196,13 @@ ImgBmapPsImagemask(interp, width, height, data)
  */
 
 static int
-ImgBmapPostscript(clientData, interp, tkwin, psinfo, x, y, width, height,
-	prepass)
-    ClientData clientData;
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    Tk_PostscriptInfo psinfo;
-    int x, y, width, height, prepass;
+ImgBmapPostscript(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tk_PostscriptInfo psinfo,
+    int x, int y, int width, int height,
+    int prepass)
 {
     BitmapMaster *masterPtr = (BitmapMaster *) clientData;
     char buffer[200];
@@ -1230,38 +1212,42 @@ ImgBmapPostscript(clientData, interp, tkwin, psinfo, x, y, width, height,
     }
 
     /*
-     * There is nothing to do for bitmaps with zero width or height
+     * There is nothing to do for bitmaps with zero width or height.
      */
-    if( width<=0 || height<=0 || masterPtr->width<=0 || masterPtr->height<=0 ){
+
+    if (width<=0 || height<=0 || masterPtr->width<=0 || masterPtr->height<= 0){
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
     /*
      * Translate the origin of the coordinate system to be the lower-left
-     * corner of the bitmap and adjust the scale of the coordinate system
-     * so that entire bitmap covers one square unit of the page.
-     * The calling function put a "gsave" into the postscript and
-     * will add a "grestore" at after this routine returns, so it is safe
-     * to make whatever changes are necessary here.
+     * corner of the bitmap and adjust the scale of the coordinate system so
+     * that entire bitmap covers one square unit of the page. The calling
+     * function put a "gsave" into the postscript and will add a "grestore" at
+     * after this routine returns, so it is safe to make whatever changes are
+     * necessary here.
      */
-    if( x!=0 || y!=0 ){
+
+    if (x!=0 || y!=0) {
 	sprintf(buffer, "%d %d moveto\n", x, y);
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, 0);
     }
-    if( width!=1 || height!=1 ){
+    if (width!=1 || height!=1) {
 	sprintf(buffer, "%d %d scale\n", width, height);
  	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, 0);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Color the background, if there is one.  This step is skipped if the
-     * background is transparent.  If the background is not transparent and
+     * Color the background, if there is one. This step is skipped if the
+     * background is transparent. If the background is not transparent and
      * there is no background mask, then color the complete rectangle that
-     * encloses the bitmap.  If there is a background mask, then only apply
+     * encloses the bitmap. If there is a background mask, then only apply
      * color to the bits specified by the mask.
      */
+
     if ((masterPtr->bgUid != NULL) && (masterPtr->bgUid[0] != '\000')) {
 	XColor color;
+
 	XParseColor(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_Colormap(tkwin), masterPtr->bgUid,
 		&color);
 	if (Tk_PostscriptColor(interp, psinfo, &color) != TCL_OK) {
@@ -1269,11 +1255,10 @@ ImgBmapPostscript(clientData, interp, tkwin, psinfo, x, y, width, height,
 	}
 	if (masterPtr->maskData == NULL) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-		"0 0 moveto 1 0 rlineto 0 1 rlineto -1 0 rlineto "
-		"closepath fill\n", 0
-	    );
+		    "0 0 moveto 1 0 rlineto 0 1 rlineto -1 0 rlineto ",
+		    "closepath fill\n", NULL);
 	} else if (ImgBmapPsImagemask(interp, masterPtr->width,
-		     masterPtr->height, masterPtr->maskData) != TCL_OK) {
+		masterPtr->height, masterPtr->maskData) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
     }
@@ -1281,8 +1266,10 @@ ImgBmapPostscript(clientData, interp, tkwin, psinfo, x, y, width, height,
     /*
      * Draw the bitmap foreground, assuming there is one.
      */
-    if ( (masterPtr->fgUid != NULL) && (masterPtr->data != NULL) ) {
+
+    if ((masterPtr->fgUid != NULL) && (masterPtr->data != NULL)) {
 	XColor color;
+
 	XParseColor(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_Colormap(tkwin), masterPtr->fgUid,
 		&color);
 	if (Tk_PostscriptColor(interp, psinfo, &color) != TCL_OK) {
@@ -1295,3 +1282,11 @@ ImgBmapPostscript(clientData, interp, tkwin, psinfo, x, y, width, height,
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkImgUtil.c b/generic/tkImgUtil.c
index d5635aa..708a374 100644
--- a/generic/tkImgUtil.c
+++ b/generic/tkImgUtil.c
@@ -1,14 +1,14 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkImgUtil.c --
  *
  *	This file contains image related utility functions.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkImgUtil.c,v 1.3 2004/01/13 02:06:00 davygrvy Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkImgUtil.c,v 1.4 2005/11/15 15:18:21 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
@@ -21,12 +21,11 @@
  *
  * TkAlignImageData --
  *
- *	This function takes an image and copies the data into an
- *	aligned buffer, performing any necessary bit swapping.
+ *	This function takes an image and copies the data into an aligned
+ *	buffer, performing any necessary bit swapping.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a newly allocated buffer that should be freed by the
- *	caller.
+ *	Returns a newly allocated buffer that should be freed by the caller.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -35,18 +34,19 @@
  */
 
 char *
-TkAlignImageData(image, alignment, bitOrder)
-    XImage *image;		/* Image to be aligned. */
-    int alignment;		/* Number of bytes to which the data should
-				 * be aligned (e.g. 2 or 4) */
-    int bitOrder;		/* Desired bit order: LSBFirst or MSBFirst. */
+TkAlignImageData(
+    XImage *image,		/* Image to be aligned. */
+    int alignment,		/* Number of bytes to which the data should be
+				 * aligned (e.g. 2 or 4) */
+    int bitOrder)		/* Desired bit order: LSBFirst or MSBFirst. */
 {
     long dataWidth;
     char *data, *srcPtr, *destPtr;
     int i, j;
 
     if (image->bits_per_pixel != 1) {
-	Tcl_Panic("TkAlignImageData: Can't handle image depths greater than 1.");
+	Tcl_Panic(
+		"TkAlignImageData: Can't handle image depths greater than 1.");
     }
 
     /*
@@ -76,3 +76,11 @@ TkAlignImageData(image, alignment, bitOrder)
     }
     return data;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkInitScript.h b/generic/tkInitScript.h
index 02da882..ee86e1b 100644
--- a/generic/tkInitScript.h
+++ b/generic/tkInitScript.h
@@ -1,24 +1,22 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkInitScript.h --
  *
  *	This file contains Unix & Windows common init script
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkInitScript.h,v 1.9 2004/03/17 18:15:43 das Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkInitScript.h,v 1.10 2005/11/15 15:18:21 dkf Exp $
  */
 
-
-
 /*
- * In order to find tk.tcl during initialization, the following script
- * is invoked by Tk_Init().  It looks in several different directories:
+ * In order to find tk.tcl during initialization, the following script is
+ * invoked by Tk_Init(). It looks in several different directories:
  *
- *	$tk_library		- can specify a primary location, if set
- *				  no other locations will be checked
+ *	$tk_library		- can specify a primary location, if set no
+ *				  other locations will be checked
  *
  *	$env(TK_LIBRARY)	- highest priority so user can always override
  *				  the search path unless the application has
@@ -29,18 +27,18 @@
  *				  lib directory (e.g. /usr/local)
  *
  *	<executable directory>/../lib/tk$tk_version
- *				- look for a lib/tk<ver> in a sibling of
- *				  the bin directory (e.g. /usr/local)
+ *				- look for a lib/tk<ver> in a sibling of the
+ *				  bin directory (e.g. /usr/local)
  *
  *	<executable directory>/../library
  *				- look in Tk build directory
  *
  *	<executable directory>/../../tk$tk_patchLevel/library
- *				- look for Tk build directory relative
- *				  to a parallel build directory
+ *				- look for Tk build directory relative to a
+ *				  parallel build directory
  *
- * The first directory on this path that contains a valid tk.tcl script
- * will be set ast the value of tk_library.
+ * The first directory on this path that contains a valid tk.tcl script will
+ * be set ast the value of tk_library.
  *
  * Note that this entire search mechanism can be bypassed by defining an
  * alternate tkInit procedure before calling Tk_Init().
@@ -54,4 +52,3 @@ static char initScript[] = "if {[info proc tkInit]==\"\"} {\n\
   }\n\
 }\n\
 tkInit";
-
diff --git a/generic/tkMenuDraw.c b/generic/tkMenuDraw.c
index ba34460..e64cce7 100644
--- a/generic/tkMenuDraw.c
+++ b/generic/tkMenuDraw.c
@@ -1,36 +1,35 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkMenuDraw.c --
  *
- *	This module implements the platform-independent drawing and
- *	geometry calculations of menu widgets.
+ *	This module implements the platform-independent drawing and geometry
+ *	calculations of menu widgets.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkMenuDraw.c,v 1.7 2003/11/18 23:39:43 dkf Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkMenuDraw.c,v 1.8 2005/11/15 15:18:21 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkMenu.h"
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static void		AdjustMenuCoords _ANSI_ARGS_ ((TkMenu *menuPtr,
-			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, int *xPtr, int *yPtr));
-static void		ComputeMenuGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		DisplayMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+static void		AdjustMenuCoords(TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
+			    int *xPtr, int *yPtr);
+static void		ComputeMenuGeometry(ClientData clientData);
+static void		DisplayMenu(ClientData clientData);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkMenuInitializeDrawingFields --
  *
- *	Fills in drawing fields of a new menu. Called when new menu is
- *	created by MenuCmd.
+ *	Fills in drawing fields of a new menu. Called when new menu is created
+ *	by MenuCmd.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -42,8 +41,8 @@ static void		DisplayMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
  */
 
 void
-TkMenuInitializeDrawingFields(menuPtr)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* The menu we are initializing. */
+TkMenuInitializeDrawingFields(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr)		/* The menu we are initializing. */
 {
     menuPtr->textGC = None;
     menuPtr->gray = None;
@@ -59,8 +58,8 @@ TkMenuInitializeDrawingFields(menuPtr)
  *
  * TkMenuInitializeEntryDrawingFields --
  *
- *	Fills in drawing fields of a new menu entry. Called when an
- *	entry is created.
+ *	Fills in drawing fields of a new menu entry. Called when an entry is
+ *	created.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -72,8 +71,8 @@ TkMenuInitializeDrawingFields(menuPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkMenuInitializeEntryDrawingFields(mePtr)
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;		/* The menu we are initializing. */
+TkMenuInitializeEntryDrawingFields(
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr)		/* The menu we are initializing. */
 {
     mePtr->width = 0;
     mePtr->height = 0;
@@ -92,8 +91,8 @@ TkMenuInitializeEntryDrawingFields(mePtr)
  *
  * TkMenuFreeDrawOptions --
  *
- *	Frees up any structures allocated for the drawing of a menu.
- *	Called when menu is deleted.
+ *	Frees up any structures allocated for the drawing of a menu. Called
+ *	when menu is deleted.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -105,8 +104,8 @@ TkMenuInitializeEntryDrawingFields(mePtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkMenuFreeDrawOptions(menuPtr)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;
+TkMenuFreeDrawOptions(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr)
 {
     if (menuPtr->textGC != None) {
 	Tk_FreeGC(menuPtr->display, menuPtr->textGC);
@@ -133,8 +132,8 @@ TkMenuFreeDrawOptions(menuPtr)
  *
  * TkMenuEntryFreeDrawOptions --
  *
- *	Frees up drawing structures for a menu entry. Called when
- *	menu entry is freed.
+ *	Frees up drawing structures for a menu entry. Called when menu entry
+ *	is freed.
  *
  * RESULTS:
  *	None.
@@ -146,8 +145,8 @@ TkMenuFreeDrawOptions(menuPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkMenuEntryFreeDrawOptions(mePtr)
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
+TkMenuEntryFreeDrawOptions(
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr)
 {
     if (mePtr->textGC != None) {
 	Tk_FreeGC(mePtr->menuPtr->display, mePtr->textGC);
@@ -168,8 +167,8 @@ TkMenuEntryFreeDrawOptions(mePtr)
  *
  * TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions --
  *
- *	Sets the menu's drawing attributes in preparation for drawing
- *	the menu.
+ *	Sets the menu's drawing attributes in preparation for drawing the
+ *	menu.
  *
  * RESULTS:
  *	None.
@@ -181,8 +180,8 @@ TkMenuEntryFreeDrawOptions(mePtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(menuPtr)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* The menu we are configuring. */
+TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr)		/* The menu we are configuring. */
 {
     XGCValues gcValues;
     GC newGC;
@@ -190,11 +189,11 @@ TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(menuPtr)
     Tk_3DBorder border, activeBorder;
     Tk_Font tkfont;
     XColor *fg, *activeFg, *indicatorFg;
- 
+
     /*
-     * A few options need special processing, such as setting the
-     * background from a 3-D border, or filling in complicated
-     * defaults that couldn't be specified to Tk_ConfigureWidget.
+     * A few options need special processing, such as setting the background
+     * from a 3-D border, or filling in complicated defaults that couldn't be
+     * specified to Tk_ConfigureWidget.
      */
 
     border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->borderPtr);
@@ -217,7 +216,7 @@ TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(menuPtr)
     if (menuPtr->disabledFgPtr != NULL) {
 	XColor *disabledFg;
 
-	disabledFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, 
+	disabledFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin,
 		menuPtr->disabledFgPtr);
 	gcValues.foreground = disabledFg->pixel;
 	mask = GCForeground|GCBackground|GCFont;
@@ -248,7 +247,7 @@ TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(menuPtr)
     if (menuPtr->gray != None) {
 	gcValues.fill_style = FillStippled;
 	gcValues.stipple = menuPtr->gray;
-	newGC = Tk_GetGC(menuPtr->tkwin, 
+	newGC = Tk_GetGC(menuPtr->tkwin,
 	    GCForeground|GCFillStyle|GCStipple, &gcValues);
     }
     if (menuPtr->disabledImageGC != None) {
@@ -259,7 +258,7 @@ TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(menuPtr)
     gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(tkfont);
     activeFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->activeFgPtr);
     gcValues.foreground = activeFg->pixel;
-    activeBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, 
+    activeBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin,
 	    menuPtr->activeBorderPtr);
     gcValues.background = Tk_3DBorderColor(activeBorder)->pixel;
     newGC = Tk_GetGC(menuPtr->tkwin, GCForeground|GCBackground|GCFont,
@@ -269,7 +268,7 @@ TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(menuPtr)
     }
     menuPtr->activeGC = newGC;
 
-    indicatorFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, 
+    indicatorFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin,
 	    menuPtr->indicatorFgPtr);
     gcValues.foreground = indicatorFg->pixel;
     gcValues.background = Tk_3DBorderColor(border)->pixel;
@@ -286,8 +285,7 @@ TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(menuPtr)
  *
  * TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions --
  *
- *	Calculates any entry-specific draw options for the given menu
- *	entry.
+ *	Calculates any entry-specific draw options for the given menu entry.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns a standard Tcl error.
@@ -299,11 +297,10 @@ TkMenuConfigureDrawOptions(menuPtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(mePtr, index)
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
-    int index;
+TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
+    int index)
 {
-
     XGCValues gcValues;
     GC newGC, newActiveGC, newDisabledGC, newIndicatorGC;
     unsigned long mask;
@@ -312,7 +309,7 @@ TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(mePtr, index)
 
     tkfont = Tk_GetFontFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin,
 	    (mePtr->fontPtr != NULL) ? mePtr->fontPtr : menuPtr->fontPtr);
-    
+
     if (mePtr->state == ENTRY_ACTIVE) {
 	if (index != menuPtr->active) {
 	    TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, index);
@@ -331,21 +328,21 @@ TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(mePtr, index)
 	    || (mePtr->indicatorFgPtr != NULL)) {
 	XColor *fg, *indicatorFg, *activeFg;
 	Tk_3DBorder border, activeBorder;
-    
+
 	fg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, (mePtr->fgPtr != NULL)
 		? mePtr->fgPtr : menuPtr->fgPtr);
 	gcValues.foreground = fg->pixel;
-	border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, 
-		(mePtr->borderPtr != NULL) ? mePtr->borderPtr 
+	border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin,
+		(mePtr->borderPtr != NULL) ? mePtr->borderPtr
 		: menuPtr->borderPtr);
 	gcValues.background = Tk_3DBorderColor(border)->pixel;
 
 	gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(tkfont);
 
 	/*
-	 * Note: disable GraphicsExpose events;  we know there won't be
-	 * obscured areas when copying from an off-screen pixmap to the
-	 * screen and this gets rid of unnecessary events.
+	 * Note: disable GraphicsExpose events; we know there won't be
+	 * obscured areas when copying from an off-screen pixmap to the screen
+	 * and this gets rid of unnecessary events.
 	 */
 
 	gcValues.graphics_exposures = False;
@@ -353,7 +350,7 @@ TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(mePtr, index)
 		GCForeground|GCBackground|GCFont|GCGraphicsExposures,
 		&gcValues);
 
-	indicatorFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, 
+	indicatorFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin,
 		(mePtr->indicatorFgPtr != NULL) ? mePtr->indicatorFgPtr
 		: menuPtr->indicatorFgPtr);
 	gcValues.foreground = indicatorFg->pixel;
@@ -364,7 +361,7 @@ TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(mePtr, index)
 	if ((menuPtr->disabledFgPtr != NULL) || (mePtr->image != NULL)) {
 	    XColor *disabledFg;
 
-	    disabledFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, 
+	    disabledFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin,
 		    menuPtr->disabledFgPtr);
 	    gcValues.foreground = disabledFg->pixel;
 	    mask = GCForeground|GCBackground|GCFont|GCGraphicsExposures;
@@ -376,13 +373,13 @@ TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(mePtr, index)
 	}
 	newDisabledGC = Tk_GetGC(menuPtr->tkwin, mask, &gcValues);
 
-	activeFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, 
+	activeFg = Tk_GetColorFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin,
 		(mePtr->activeFgPtr != NULL) ? mePtr->activeFgPtr
 		: menuPtr->activeFgPtr);
-	activeBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, 
-		(mePtr->activeBorderPtr != NULL) ? mePtr->activeBorderPtr 
+	activeBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin,
+		(mePtr->activeBorderPtr != NULL) ? mePtr->activeBorderPtr
 		: menuPtr->activeBorderPtr);
-		
+
 	gcValues.foreground = activeFg->pixel;
 	gcValues.background = Tk_3DBorderColor(activeBorder)->pixel;
 	newActiveGC = Tk_GetGC(menuPtr->tkwin,
@@ -395,15 +392,15 @@ TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(mePtr, index)
 	newIndicatorGC = None;
     }
     if (mePtr->textGC != None) {
-	    Tk_FreeGC(menuPtr->display, mePtr->textGC);
+	Tk_FreeGC(menuPtr->display, mePtr->textGC);
     }
     mePtr->textGC = newGC;
     if (mePtr->activeGC != None) {
-	    Tk_FreeGC(menuPtr->display, mePtr->activeGC);
+	Tk_FreeGC(menuPtr->display, mePtr->activeGC);
     }
     mePtr->activeGC = newActiveGC;
     if (mePtr->disabledGC != None) {
-	    Tk_FreeGC(menuPtr->display, mePtr->disabledGC);
+	Tk_FreeGC(menuPtr->display, mePtr->disabledGC);
     }
     mePtr->disabledGC = newDisabledGC;
     if (mePtr->indicatorGC != None) {
@@ -431,8 +428,8 @@ TkMenuConfigureEntryDrawOptions(mePtr, index)
  */
 
 void
-TkEventuallyRecomputeMenu(menuPtr)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;
+TkEventuallyRecomputeMenu(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr)
 {
     if (!(menuPtr->menuFlags & RESIZE_PENDING)) {
 	menuPtr->menuFlags |= RESIZE_PENDING;
@@ -445,8 +442,8 @@ TkEventuallyRecomputeMenu(menuPtr)
  *
  * TkRecomputeMenu --
  *
- *	Tells Tcl to redo the geometry because this menu has changed.
- *	Does it now; removes any ComputeMenuGeometries from the idler.
+ *	Tells Tcl to redo the geometry because this menu has changed. Does it
+ *	now; removes any ComputeMenuGeometries from the idler.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -458,9 +455,9 @@ TkEventuallyRecomputeMenu(menuPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkRecomputeMenu(menuPtr)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;
-{    
+TkRecomputeMenu(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr)
+{
     if (menuPtr->menuFlags & RESIZE_PENDING) {
 	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(ComputeMenuGeometry, (ClientData) menuPtr);
 	ComputeMenuGeometry((ClientData) menuPtr);
@@ -472,27 +469,27 @@ TkRecomputeMenu(menuPtr)
  *
  * TkEventuallyRedrawMenu --
  *
- *	Arrange for an entry of a menu, or the whole menu, to be
- *	redisplayed at some point in the future.
+ *	Arrange for an entry of a menu, or the whole menu, to be redisplayed
+ *	at some point in the future.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A when-idle hander is scheduled to do the redisplay, if there
- *	isn't one already scheduled.
+ *	A when-idle hander is scheduled to do the redisplay, if there isn't
+ *	one already scheduled.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, mePtr)
-    register TkMenu *menuPtr;	/* Information about menu to redraw. */
-    register TkMenuEntry *mePtr;/* Entry to redraw.  NULL means redraw
-				 * all the entries in the menu. */
+TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(
+    register TkMenu *menuPtr,	/* Information about menu to redraw. */
+    register TkMenuEntry *mePtr)/* Entry to redraw. NULL means redraw all the
+				 * entries in the menu. */
 {
     int i;
-    
+
     if (menuPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
 	return;
     }
@@ -516,25 +513,23 @@ TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, mePtr)
  *
  * ComputeMenuGeometry --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to recompute the size and
- *	layout of a menu.  It is called as a when-idle handler so
- *	that it only gets done once, even if a group of changes is
- *	made to the menu.
+ *	This function is invoked to recompute the size and layout of a menu.
+ *	It is called as a when-idle handler so that it only gets done once,
+ *	even if a group of changes is made to the menu.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Fields of menu entries are changed to reflect their
- *	current positions, and the size of the menu window
- *	itself may be changed.
+ *	Fields of menu entries are changed to reflect their current positions,
+ *	and the size of the menu window itself may be changed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ComputeMenuGeometry(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Structure describing menu. */
+ComputeMenuGeometry(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Structure describing menu. */
 {
     TkMenu *menuPtr = (TkMenu *) clientData;
 
@@ -553,16 +548,15 @@ ComputeMenuGeometry(clientData)
 	Tk_GeometryRequest(menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->totalWidth,
 		menuPtr->totalHeight);
     }
-	
+
     /*
-     * Must always force a redisplay here if the window is mapped
-     * (even if the size didn't change, something else might have
-     * changed in the menu, such as a label or accelerator).  The
-     * resize will force a redisplay above.
+     * Must always force a redisplay here if the window is mapped (even if the
+     * size didn't change, something else might have changed in the menu, such
+     * as a label or accelerator). The resize will force a redisplay above.
      */
-    
-    TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, (TkMenuEntry *) NULL);
-    
+
+    TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, NULL);
+
     menuPtr->menuFlags &= ~RESIZE_PENDING;
 }
 
@@ -571,9 +565,9 @@ ComputeMenuGeometry(clientData)
  *
  * TkMenuSelectImageProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the image code whenever the manager
- *	for an image does something that affects the size of contents
- *	of an image displayed in a menu entry when it is selected.
+ *	This function is invoked by the image code whenever the manager for an
+ *	image does something that affects the size of contents of an image
+ *	displayed in a menu entry when it is selected.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -585,20 +579,18 @@ ComputeMenuGeometry(clientData)
  */
 
 void
-TkMenuSelectImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth,
-	imgHeight)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to widget record. */
-    int x, y;				/* Upper left pixel (within image)
-					 * that must be redisplayed. */
-    int width, height;			/* Dimensions of area to redisplay
-					 * (may be <= 0). */
-    int imgWidth, imgHeight;		/* New dimensions of image. */
+TkMenuSelectImageProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to widget record. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
+				 * be redisplayed. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of area to redisplay (may be
+				 * <=0). */
+    int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
 {
     register TkMenuEntry *mePtr = (TkMenuEntry *) clientData;
 
     if ((mePtr->entryFlags & ENTRY_SELECTED)
-	    && !(mePtr->menuPtr->menuFlags &
-	    REDRAW_PENDING)) {
+	    && !(mePtr->menuPtr->menuFlags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
 	mePtr->menuPtr->menuFlags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayMenu, (ClientData) mePtr->menuPtr);
     }
@@ -609,21 +601,20 @@ TkMenuSelectImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth,
  *
  * DisplayMenu --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to display a menu widget.
+ *	This function is invoked to display a menu widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its
- *	current mode.
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its current mode.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayMenu(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about widget. */
+DisplayMenu(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
     register TkMenu *menuPtr = (TkMenu *) clientData;
     register TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
@@ -650,8 +641,8 @@ DisplayMenu(clientData)
 	    menuPtr->activeBorderWidthPtr, &activeBorderWidth);
 
     if (menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) {
-	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), border, borderWidth, 
-		borderWidth, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * borderWidth,	
+	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), border, borderWidth,
+		borderWidth, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * borderWidth,
 		Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * borderWidth, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
     }
 
@@ -689,15 +680,15 @@ DisplayMenu(clientData)
 	    }
 	}
 	TkpDrawMenuEntry(mePtr, Tk_WindowId(menuPtr->tkwin), tkfont,
-		&menuMetrics, mePtr->x, mePtr->y, width, 
+		&menuMetrics, mePtr->x, mePtr->y, width,
 		mePtr->height, strictMotif, 1);
 	if ((index > 0) && (menuPtr->menuType != MENUBAR)
 		&& mePtr->columnBreak) {
 	    mePtr = menuPtr->entries[index - 1];
 	    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), border,
-		mePtr->x, mePtr->y + mePtr->height, 
+		mePtr->x, mePtr->y + mePtr->height,
 		mePtr->width,
-		Tk_Height(tkwin) - mePtr->y - mePtr->height - 
+		Tk_Height(tkwin) - mePtr->y - mePtr->height -
 		activeBorderWidth, 0,
 		TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
 	}
@@ -713,7 +704,7 @@ DisplayMenu(clientData)
 	} else {
 	    mePtr = menuPtr->entries[menuPtr->numEntries - 1];
 	    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
-		border, mePtr->x, mePtr->y + mePtr->height, mePtr->width, 
+		border, mePtr->x, mePtr->y + mePtr->height, mePtr->width,
 		Tk_Height(tkwin) - mePtr->y - mePtr->height
 		- activeBorderWidth, 0,
 		TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
@@ -722,13 +713,13 @@ DisplayMenu(clientData)
 	    width = Tk_Width(tkwin) - x - activeBorderWidth;
 	    height = Tk_Height(tkwin) - y - activeBorderWidth;
 	}
-	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), border, x, y, 
+	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), border, x, y,
 		width, height, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
     }
 
     Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->reliefPtr, &relief);
     Tk_Draw3DRectangle(menuPtr->tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
-	    border, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), borderWidth, 
+	    border, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), borderWidth,
 	    relief);
 }
 
@@ -737,31 +728,31 @@ DisplayMenu(clientData)
  *
  * TkMenuEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various
- *	events on menus.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various events on
+ *	menus.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up. When
+ *	it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkMenuEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+TkMenuEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
     TkMenu *menuPtr = (TkMenu *) clientData;
-    
+
     if ((eventPtr->type == Expose) && (eventPtr->xexpose.count == 0)) {
-	TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, (TkMenuEntry *) NULL);
+	TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, NULL);
     } else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) {
 	TkEventuallyRecomputeMenu(menuPtr);
-	TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, (TkMenuEntry *) NULL);
+	TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, NULL);
     } else if (eventPtr->type == ActivateNotify) {
 	if (menuPtr->menuType == TEAROFF_MENU) {
 	    TkpSetMainMenubar(menuPtr->interp, menuPtr->tkwin, NULL);
@@ -798,9 +789,9 @@ TkMenuEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * TkMenuImageProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the image code whenever the manager
- *	for an image does something that affects the size of contents
- *	of an image displayed in a menu entry.
+ *	This function is invoked by the image code whenever the manager for an
+ *	image does something that affects the size of contents of an image
+ *	displayed in a menu entry.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -812,19 +803,17 @@ TkMenuEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkMenuImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth,
-	imgHeight)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to widget record. */
-    int x, y;				/* Upper left pixel (within image)
-					 * that must be redisplayed. */
-    int width, height;			/* Dimensions of area to redisplay
-					 * (may be <= 0). */
-    int imgWidth, imgHeight;		/* New dimensions of image. */
+TkMenuImageProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to widget record. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
+				 * be redisplayed. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of area to redisplay (may be
+				 * <=0). */
+    int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
 {
     register TkMenu *menuPtr = ((TkMenuEntry *)clientData)->menuPtr;
 
-    if ((menuPtr->tkwin != NULL) && !(menuPtr->menuFlags
-	    & RESIZE_PENDING)) {
+    if ((menuPtr->tkwin != NULL) && !(menuPtr->menuFlags & RESIZE_PENDING)) {
 	menuPtr->menuFlags |= RESIZE_PENDING;
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ComputeMenuGeometry, (ClientData) menuPtr);
     }
@@ -835,9 +824,9 @@ TkMenuImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth,
  *
  * TkPostTearoffMenu --
  *
- *	Posts a menu on the screen. Used to post tearoff menus. On Unix,
- *	all menus are posted this way. Adjusts the menu's position
- *	so that it fits on the screen, and maps and raises the menu.
+ *	Posts a menu on the screen. Used to post tearoff menus. On Unix, all
+ *	menus are posted this way. Adjusts the menu's position so that it fits
+ *	on the screen, and maps and raises the menu.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns a standard Tcl Error.
@@ -849,13 +838,11 @@ TkMenuImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth,
  */
 
 int
-TkPostTearoffMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* The interpreter of the menu */
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;			/* The menu we are posting */
-    int x;				/* The root X coordinate where we
-					 * are posting */
-    int y;				/* The root Y coordinate where we
-					 * are posting */
+TkPostTearoffMenu(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* The interpreter of the menu */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,		/* The menu we are posting */
+    int x, int y)		/* The root X,Y coordinates where we are
+				 * posting */
 {
     int vRootX, vRootY, vRootWidth, vRootHeight;
     int tmp, result;
@@ -868,8 +855,8 @@ TkPostTearoffMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The post commands could have deleted the menu, which means
-     * we are dead and should go away.
+     * The post commands could have deleted the menu, which means we are dead
+     * and should go away.
      */
 
     if (menuPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
@@ -877,27 +864,24 @@ TkPostTearoffMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Adjust the position of the menu if necessary to keep it
-     * visible on the screen.  There are two special tricks to
-     * make this work right:
+     * Adjust the position of the menu if necessary to keep it visible on the
+     * screen. There are two special tricks to make this work right:
      *
-     * 1. If a virtual root window manager is being used then
-     *    the coordinates are in the virtual root window of
-     *    menuPtr's parent;  since the menu uses override-redirect
-     *    mode it will be in the *real* root window for the screen,
-     *    so we have to map the coordinates from the virtual root
-     *    (if any) to the real root.  Can't get the virtual root
-     *    from the menu itself (it will never be seen by the wm)
-     *    so use its parent instead (it would be better to have an
-     *    an option that names a window to use for this...).
-     * 2. The menu may not have been mapped yet, so its current size
-     *    might be the default 1x1.  To compute how much space it
-     *    needs, use its requested size, not its actual size.
+     * 1. If a virtual root window manager is being used then the coordinates
+     *    are in the virtual root window of menuPtr's parent; since the menu
+     *    uses override-redirect mode it will be in the *real* root window for
+     *    the screen, so we have to map the coordinates from the virtual root
+     *    (if any) to the real root. Can't get the virtual root from the menu
+     *    itself (it will never be seen by the wm) so use its parent instead
+     *    (it would be better to have an an option that names a window to use
+     *    for this...).
+     * 2. The menu may not have been mapped yet, so its current size might be
+     *    the default 1x1. To compute how much space it needs, use its
+     *    requested size, not its actual size.
      *
-     * Note that this code assumes square screen regions and all
-     * positive coordinates. This does not work on a Mac with
-     * multiple monitors. But then again, Tk has other problems
-     * with this.
+     * Note that this code assumes square screen regions and all positive
+     * coordinates. This does not work on a Mac with multiple monitors. But
+     * then again, Tk has other problems with this.
      */
 
     Tk_GetVRootGeometry(Tk_Parent(menuPtr->tkwin), &vRootX, &vRootY,
@@ -933,29 +917,28 @@ TkPostTearoffMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y)
  *
  * TkPostSubmenu --
  *
- *	This procedure arranges for a particular submenu (i.e. the
- *	menu corresponding to a given cascade entry) to be
- *	posted.
+ *	This function arranges for a particular submenu (i.e. the menu
+ *	corresponding to a given cascade entry) to be posted.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return result.  Errors may occur in the
- *	Tcl commands generated to post and unpost submenus.
+ *	A standard Tcl return result. Errors may occur in the Tcl commands
+ *	generated to post and unpost submenus.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If there is already a submenu posted, it is unposted.
- *	The new submenu is then posted.
+ *	If there is already a submenu posted, it is unposted. The new submenu
+ *	is then posted.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-TkPostSubmenu(interp, menuPtr, mePtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for invoking sub-commands and
+TkPostSubmenu(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for invoking sub-commands and
 				 * reporting errors. */
-    register TkMenu *menuPtr;	/* Information about menu as a whole. */
-    register TkMenuEntry *mePtr;	/* Info about submenu that is to be
-				 * posted.  NULL means make sure that
-				 * no submenu is posted. */
+    register TkMenu *menuPtr,	/* Information about menu as a whole. */
+    register TkMenuEntry *mePtr)/* Info about submenu that is to be posted.
+				 * NULL means make sure that no submenu is
+				 * posted. */
 {
     int result, x, y;
     Tcl_Obj *subary[4];
@@ -966,26 +949,24 @@ TkPostSubmenu(interp, menuPtr, mePtr)
 
     if (menuPtr->postedCascade != NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * Note: when unposting a submenu, we have to redraw the entire
-	 * parent menu.  This is because of a combination of the following
-	 * things:
+	 * Note: when unposting a submenu, we have to redraw the entire parent
+	 * menu. This is because of a combination of the following things:
 	 * (a) the submenu partially overlaps the parent.
-	 * (b) the submenu specifies "save under", which causes the X
-	 *     server to make a copy of the information under it when it
-	 *     is posted.  When the submenu is unposted, the X server
-	 *     copies this data back and doesn't generate any Expose
-	 *     events for the parent.
-	 * (c) the parent may have redisplayed itself after the submenu
-	 *     was posted, in which case the saved information is no
-	 *     longer correct.
-	 * The simplest solution is just force a complete redisplay of
-	 * the parent.
+	 * (b) the submenu specifies "save under", which causes the X server
+	 *     to make a copy of the information under it when it is posted.
+	 *     When the submenu is unposted, the X server copies this data
+	 *     back and doesn't generate any Expose events for the parent.
+	 * (c) the parent may have redisplayed itself after the submenu was
+	 *     posted, in which case the saved information is no longer
+	 *     correct.
+	 * The simplest solution is just force a complete redisplay of the
+	 * parent.
 	 */
 
 	subary[0] = menuPtr->postedCascade->namePtr;
 	subary[1] = Tcl_NewStringObj("unpost", -1);
 	Tcl_IncrRefCount(subary[1]);
-	TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, (TkMenuEntry *) NULL);
+	TkEventuallyRedrawMenu(menuPtr, NULL);
 	result = Tcl_EvalObjv(interp, 2, subary, 0);
 	Tcl_DecrRefCount(subary[1]);
 	menuPtr->postedCascade = NULL;
@@ -997,9 +978,9 @@ TkPostSubmenu(interp, menuPtr, mePtr)
     if ((mePtr != NULL) && (mePtr->namePtr != NULL)
 	    && Tk_IsMapped(menuPtr->tkwin)) {
 	/*
-	 * Position the cascade with its upper left corner slightly
-	 * below and to the left of the upper right corner of the
-	 * menu entry (this is an attempt to match Motif behavior).
+	 * Position the cascade with its upper left corner slightly below and
+	 * to the left of the upper right corner of the menu entry (this is an
+	 * attempt to match Motif behavior).
 	 *
 	 * The menu has to redrawn so that the entry can change relief.
 	 */
@@ -1032,8 +1013,7 @@ TkPostSubmenu(interp, menuPtr, mePtr)
  *
  * AdjustMenuCoords --
  *
- *	Adjusts the given coordinates down and the left to give a Motif
- *	look.
+ *	Adjusts the given coordinates down and the left to give a Motif look.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1045,11 +1025,11 @@ TkPostSubmenu(interp, menuPtr, mePtr)
  */
 
 static void
-AdjustMenuCoords(menuPtr, mePtr, xPtr, yPtr)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
-    int *xPtr;
-    int *yPtr;
+AdjustMenuCoords(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
+    int *xPtr,
+    int *yPtr)
 {
     if (menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) {
 	*xPtr += mePtr->x;
@@ -1059,10 +1039,18 @@ AdjustMenuCoords(menuPtr, mePtr, xPtr, yPtr)
 
 	Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->borderWidthPtr,
 		&borderWidth);
-	Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin, 
+	Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, menuPtr->tkwin,
 		menuPtr->activeBorderWidthPtr, &activeBorderWidth);
-	*xPtr += Tk_Width(menuPtr->tkwin) - borderWidth	- activeBorderWidth 
+	*xPtr += Tk_Width(menuPtr->tkwin) - borderWidth	- activeBorderWidth
 		- 2;
 	*yPtr += mePtr->y + activeBorderWidth + 2;
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkMenubutton.c b/generic/tkMenubutton.c
index 504495a..c720025 100644
--- a/generic/tkMenubutton.c
+++ b/generic/tkMenubutton.c
@@ -1,16 +1,16 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkMenubutton.c --
  *
- *	This module implements button-like widgets that are used
- *	to invoke pull-down menus.
+ *	This module implements button-like widgets that are used to invoke
+ *	pull-down menus.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkMenubutton.c,v 1.13 2003/11/17 23:12:44 hobbs Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkMenubutton.c,v 1.14 2005/11/15 15:18:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkMenubutton.h"
@@ -18,31 +18,30 @@
 #include "default.h"
 
 /*
- * The following table defines the legal values for the -direction 
- * option.  It is used together with the "enum direction" declaration 
- * in tkMenubutton.h.
+ * The following table defines the legal values for the -direction option. It
+ * is used together with the "enum direction" declaration in tkMenubutton.h.
  */
 
 static char *directionStrings[] = {
-    "above", "below", "flush", "left", "right", (char *) NULL
+    "above", "below", "flush", "left", "right", NULL
 };
 
 /*
- * The following table defines the legal values for the -state option.
- * It is used together with the "enum state" declaration in tkMenubutton.h.
+ * The following table defines the legal values for the -state option. It is
+ * used together with the "enum state" declaration in tkMenubutton.h.
  */
 
 static char *stateStrings[] = {
-    "active", "disabled", "normal", (char *) NULL
+    "active", "disabled", "normal", NULL
 };
 
 /*
- * The following table defines the legal values for the -compound option.
- * It is used with the "enum compound" declaration in tkMenuButton.h
+ * The following table defines the legal values for the -compound option. It
+ * is used with the "enum compound" declaration in tkMenuButton.h
  */
 
 static char *compoundStrings[] = {
-    "bottom", "center", "left", "none", "right", "top", (char *) NULL
+    "bottom", "center", "left", "none", "right", "top", NULL
 };
 
 /*
@@ -51,59 +50,59 @@ static char *compoundStrings[] = {
 
 static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-activebackground", "activeBackground", "Foreground",
-        DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR, -1, 
-        Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, activeBorder), 0, 
+        DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR, -1,
+        Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, activeBorder), 0,
         (ClientData) DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-activeforeground", "activeForeground", "Background",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_COLOR, -1, 
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_COLOR, -1,
          Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, activeFg),
          0, (ClientData) DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, "-anchor", "anchor", "Anchor",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_ANCHOR, -1, 
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_ANCHOR, -1,
         Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, anchor), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, normalBorder),
         0, (ClientData) DEF_MENUBUTTON_BG_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0,
+	(ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0,
+	(ClientData) "-background", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bitmap", "bitmap", "Bitmap",
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_BITMAP, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, bitmap),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, 
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_BORDER_WIDTH, -1,
         Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, borderWidth), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, cursor),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-direction", "direction", "Direction",
-    	DEF_MENUBUTTON_DIRECTION, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, direction), 
+    	DEF_MENUBUTTON_DIRECTION, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, direction),
 	0, (ClientData) directionStrings, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", "disabledForeground",
 	"DisabledForeground", DEF_MENUBUTTON_DISABLED_FG_COLOR,
 	-1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, disabledFg), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
 	(ClientData) DEF_MENUBUTTON_DISABLED_FG_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0,
+	(ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, normalFg), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-height", "height", "Height",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_HEIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, heightString), 
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_HEIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, heightString),
         0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
 	"HighlightBackground", DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG_COLOR,
 	-1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, highlightBgColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT, -1, 
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT, -1,
         Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, highlightColorPtr),	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
 	"HighlightThickness", DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH,
 	-1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", "image", "Image",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_IMAGE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, imageString), 
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_IMAGE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, imageString),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-indicatoron", "indicatorOn", "IndicatorOn",
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_INDICATOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, indicatorOn),
@@ -111,7 +110,7 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
 	DEF_BUTTON_JUSTIFY, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, justify), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-menu", "menu", "Menu",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_MENU, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, menuName), 
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_MENU, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, menuName),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad",
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_PADX, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, padX),
@@ -120,7 +119,7 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_PADY, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, padY),
 	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, relief), 
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, relief),
         0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-compound", "compound", "Compound",
          DEF_BUTTON_COMPOUND, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, compound), 0,
@@ -129,34 +128,33 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, state),
 	0, (ClientData) stateStrings, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_TAKE_FOCUS, -1, 
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_TAKE_FOCUS, -1,
         Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, takeFocus), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-text", "text", "Text",
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_TEXT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, text), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_TEXT_VARIABLE, -1, 
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_TEXT_VARIABLE, -1,
         Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, textVarName), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-underline", "underline", "Underline",
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_UNDERLINE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, underline),
          0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-width", "width", "Width",
-	DEF_MENUBUTTON_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, widthString), 
+	DEF_MENUBUTTON_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, widthString),
         0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-wraplength", "wrapLength", "WrapLength",
 	DEF_MENUBUTTON_WRAP_LENGTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkMenuButton, wrapLength),
         0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, 0}
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, 0}
 };
 
 /*
- * The following tables define the menubutton widget commands and map the 
- * indexes into the string tables into a single enumerated type used 
- * to dispatch the scale widget command.
+ * The following tables define the menubutton widget commands and map the
+ * indexes into the string tables into a single enumerated type used to
+ * dispatch the scale widget command.
  */
 
 static CONST char *commandNames[] = {
-    "cget", "configure", (char *) NULL
+    "cget", "configure", NULL
 };
 
 enum command {
@@ -164,35 +162,34 @@ enum command {
 };
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static void		MenuButtonCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		MenuButtonEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void		MenuButtonImageProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+static void		MenuButtonCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		MenuButtonEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		MenuButtonImageProc(ClientData clientData,
 			    int x, int y, int width, int height, int imgWidth,
-			    int imgHeight));
-static char *		MenuButtonTextVarProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    CONST char *name1, CONST char *name2, int flags));
-static int		MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((
-                            ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, 
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		ConfigureMenuButton _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkMenuButton *mbPtr, int objc, 
-                            Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		DestroyMenuButton _ANSI_ARGS_((char *memPtr));
+			    int imgHeight);
+static char *		MenuButtonTextVarProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name1,
+			    CONST char *name2, int flags);
+static int		MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		ConfigureMenuButton(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    TkMenuButton *mbPtr, int objc,
+                            Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		DestroyMenuButton(char *memPtr);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_MenubuttonObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "button", "label",
- *	"radiobutton", and "checkbutton" Tcl commands.  See the
- *	user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "button", "label",
+ *	"radiobutton", and "checkbutton" Tcl commands. See the user
+ *	documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -204,11 +201,11 @@ static void		DestroyMenuButton _ANSI_ARGS_((char *memPtr));
  */
 
 int
-Tk_MenubuttonObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* NULL. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_MenubuttonObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* NULL. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     register TkMenuButton *mbPtr;
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
@@ -224,14 +221,14 @@ Tk_MenubuttonObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
      */
 
     tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
-	    Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), NULL);
     if (tkwin == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the option table for this widget class.  If it has already
-     * been created, the cached pointer will be returned.
+     * Create the option table for this widget class. If it has already been
+     * created, the cached pointer will be returned.
      */
 
     optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs);
@@ -248,8 +245,8 @@ Tk_MenubuttonObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     mbPtr->tkwin = tkwin;
     mbPtr->display = Tk_Display (tkwin);
     mbPtr->interp = interp;
-    mbPtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, 
-            Tk_PathName(mbPtr->tkwin), MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd, 
+    mbPtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
+            Tk_PathName(mbPtr->tkwin), MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd,
             (ClientData) mbPtr, MenuButtonCmdDeletedProc);
     mbPtr->optionTable = optionTable;
     mbPtr->menuName = NULL;
@@ -320,9 +317,9 @@ Tk_MenubuttonObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to a widget managed by this module.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a widget managed by this module. See the user documentation for
+ *	details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -334,11 +331,11 @@ Tk_MenubuttonObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about button widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about button widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     register TkMenuButton *mbPtr = (TkMenuButton *) clientData;
     int result, index;
@@ -348,52 +345,48 @@ MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
         Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], 
-            commandNames, "option", 0, &index);
+    result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], commandNames, "option", 0,
+	    &index);
     if (result != TCL_OK) {
         return result;
     }
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) mbPtr);
 
     switch (index) {
-        case COMMAND_CGET: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "cget option");
+    case COMMAND_CGET:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "cget option");
 	    goto error;
-	    }
+	}
 
-	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) mbPtr,
-                    mbPtr->optionTable, objv[2], mbPtr->tkwin);
-	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
-	        goto error;
-	    } else {
-	        Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) mbPtr,
+		mbPtr->optionTable, objv[2], mbPtr->tkwin);
+	if (objPtr == NULL) {
+	    goto error;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
 	}
+	break;
 
-        case COMMAND_CONFIGURE: {
-	    if (objc <= 3) {
-		objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) mbPtr,
-			mbPtr->optionTable,
-			(objc == 3) ? objv[2] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
-			mbPtr->tkwin);
-		if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		    goto error;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-		}
+    case COMMAND_CONFIGURE:
+	if (objc <= 3) {
+	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) mbPtr,
+		    mbPtr->optionTable, (objc == 3) ? objv[2] : NULL,
+		    mbPtr->tkwin);
+	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
+		goto error;
 	    } else {
-		result = ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc-2, 
-		        objv+2);
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
 	    }
-	    break;
+	} else {
+	    result = ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc-2, objv+2);
 	}
+	break;
     }
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) mbPtr);
     return result;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) mbPtr);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -403,10 +396,10 @@ MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * DestroyMenuButton --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to recycle all of the resources
- *	associated with a menubutton widget.  It is invoked as a
- *	when-idle handler in order to make sure that there is no
- *	other use of the menubutton pending at the time of the deletion.
+ *	This function is invoked to recycle all of the resources associated
+ *	with a menubutton widget. It is invoked as a when-idle handler in
+ *	order to make sure that there is no other use of the menubutton
+ *	pending at the time of the deletion.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -418,8 +411,8 @@ MenuButtonWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyMenuButton(memPtr)
-    char *memPtr;		/* Info about button widget. */
+DestroyMenuButton(
+    char *memPtr)		/* Info about button widget. */
 {
     register TkMenuButton *mbPtr = (TkMenuButton *) memPtr;
     TkpDestroyMenuButton(mbPtr);
@@ -429,9 +422,8 @@ DestroyMenuButton(memPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then
-     * let Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related
-     * stuff.
+     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then let
+     * Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related stuff.
      */
 
     Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(mbPtr->interp, mbPtr->widgetCmd);
@@ -471,31 +463,30 @@ DestroyMenuButton(memPtr)
  *
  * ConfigureMenuButton --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an argv/argc list, plus
- *	the Tk option database, in order to configure (or
- *	reconfigure) a menubutton widget.
+ *	This function is called to process an argv/argc list, plus the Tk
+ *	option database, in order to configure (or reconfigure) a menubutton
+ *	widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as text string, colors, font,
- *	etc. get set for mbPtr;  old resources get freed, if there
- *	were any.  The menubutton is redisplayed.
+ *	Configuration information, such as text string, colors, font, etc. get
+ *	set for mbPtr; old resources get freed, if there were any. The
+ *	menubutton is redisplayed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    register TkMenuButton *mbPtr;	
-                                /* Information about widget;  may or may
-				 * not already have values for some 
-				 * fields. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of valid entries in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Arguments. */
+ConfigureMenuButton(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    register TkMenuButton *mbPtr,
+                                /* Information about widget; may or may not
+				 * already have values for some fields. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of valid entries in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Arguments. */
 {
     Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
     Tcl_Obj *errorResult = NULL;
@@ -503,21 +494,20 @@ ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc, objv)
     Tk_Image image;
 
     /*
-     * Eliminate any existing trace on variables monitored by the 
-     * menubutton.
+     * Eliminate any existing trace on variables monitored by the menubutton.
      */
 
     if (mbPtr->textVarName != NULL) {
-	Tcl_UntraceVar(interp, mbPtr->textVarName, 
+	Tcl_UntraceVar(interp, mbPtr->textVarName,
 		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
 		MenuButtonTextVarProc, (ClientData) mbPtr);
     }
 
     /*
-     * The following loop is potentially executed twice.  During the
-     * first pass configuration options get set to their new values.
-     * If there is an error in this pass, we execute a second pass
-     * to restore all the options to their previous values.
+     * The following loop is potentially executed twice. During the first pass
+     * configuration options get set to their new values. If there is an error
+     * in this pass, we execute a second pass to restore all the options to
+     * their previous values.
      */
 
     for (error = 0; error <= 1; error++) {
@@ -528,7 +518,7 @@ ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc, objv)
 
 	    if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) mbPtr,
 		    mbPtr->optionTable, objc, objv,
-		    mbPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, (int *) NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+		    mbPtr->tkwin, &savedOptions, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
 		continue;
 	    }
 	} else {
@@ -543,8 +533,8 @@ ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc, objv)
 
 	/*
 	 * A few options need special processing, such as setting the
-	 * background from a 3-D border, or filling in complicated
-	 * defaults that couldn't be specified to Tk_SetOptions.
+	 * background from a 3-D border, or filling in complicated defaults
+	 * that couldn't be specified to Tk_SetOptions.
 	 */
 
 	if ((mbPtr->state == STATE_ACTIVE)
@@ -566,14 +556,14 @@ ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Get the image for the widget, if there is one.  Allocate the
-	 * new image before freeing the old one, so that the reference
-	 * count doesn't go to zero and cause image data to be discarded.
+	 * Get the image for the widget, if there is one. Allocate the new
+	 * image before freeing the old one, so that the reference count
+	 * doesn't go to zero and cause image data to be discarded.
 	 */
 
 	if (mbPtr->imageString != NULL) {
 	    image = Tk_GetImage(mbPtr->interp, mbPtr->tkwin,
-		    mbPtr->imageString, MenuButtonImageProc, 
+		    mbPtr->imageString, MenuButtonImageProc,
 		    (ClientData) mbPtr);
 	    if (image == NULL) {
 	        return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -593,13 +583,13 @@ ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc, objv)
 	if ((mbPtr->bitmap != None) || (mbPtr->image != NULL)) {
 	    if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, mbPtr->tkwin, mbPtr->widthString,
                     &mbPtr->width) != TCL_OK) {
-                widthError:
+	    widthError:
 	        Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (processing -width option)");
 		continue;
 	    }
 	    if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, mbPtr->tkwin, mbPtr->heightString,
 		    &mbPtr->height) != TCL_OK) {
-	        heightError:
+	    heightError:
 	        Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (processing -height option)");
 		continue;
 	    }
@@ -617,35 +607,34 @@ ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc, objv)
     }
 
     if (!error) {
-      Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
+	Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
     }
 
     if ((mbPtr->image == NULL) && (mbPtr->bitmap == None)
 	    && (mbPtr->textVarName != NULL)) {
 
-      /*
-       * The menubutton displays the value of a variable.  
-       * Set up a trace to watch for any changes in it, create
-       * the variable if it doesn't exist, and fetch its
-       * current value.
-       */
-
-      CONST char *value;
-
-      value = Tcl_GetVar(interp, mbPtr->textVarName, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
-      if (value == NULL) {
-	  Tcl_SetVar(interp, mbPtr->textVarName, mbPtr->text,
-		     TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
-      } else {
-	  if (mbPtr->text != NULL) {
-	      ckfree(mbPtr->text);
-	  }
-	  mbPtr->text = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (strlen(value) + 1));
-	  strcpy(mbPtr->text, value);
-      }
-      Tcl_TraceVar(interp, mbPtr->textVarName,
-		   TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
-		   MenuButtonTextVarProc, (ClientData) mbPtr);
+	/*
+	 * The menubutton displays the value of a variable. Set up a trace to
+	 * watch for any changes in it, create the variable if it doesn't
+	 * exist, and fetch its current value.
+	 */
+
+	CONST char *value;
+
+	value = Tcl_GetVar(interp, mbPtr->textVarName, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+	if (value == NULL) {
+	    Tcl_SetVar(interp, mbPtr->textVarName, mbPtr->text,
+		    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+	} else {
+	    if (mbPtr->text != NULL) {
+		ckfree(mbPtr->text);
+	    }
+	    mbPtr->text = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (strlen(value) + 1));
+	    strcpy(mbPtr->text, value);
+	}
+	Tcl_TraceVar(interp, mbPtr->textVarName,
+		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
+		MenuButtonTextVarProc, (ClientData) mbPtr);
     }
 
     TkMenuButtonWorldChanged((ClientData) mbPtr);
@@ -653,9 +642,8 @@ ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc, objv)
 	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, errorResult);
 	Tcl_DecrRefCount(errorResult);
         return TCL_ERROR;
-    } else {
-        return TCL_OK;
     }
+    return TCL_OK;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -663,9 +651,9 @@ ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * TkMenuButtonWorldChanged --
  *
- *      This procedure is called when the world has changed in some
- *      way and the widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts
- *	and determine its new geometry.
+ *      This function is called when the world has changed in some way and the
+ *      widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts and determine its
+ *      new geometry.
  *
  * Results:
  *      None.
@@ -675,10 +663,10 @@ ConfigureMenuButton(interp, mbPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 void
-TkMenuButtonWorldChanged(instanceData)
-    ClientData instanceData;	/* Information about widget. */
+TkMenuButtonWorldChanged(
+    ClientData instanceData)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
     XGCValues gcValues;
     GC gc;
@@ -692,9 +680,9 @@ TkMenuButtonWorldChanged(instanceData)
     gcValues.background = Tk_3DBorderColor(mbPtr->normalBorder)->pixel;
 
     /*
-     * Note: GraphicsExpose events are disabled in GC's because they're
-     * used to copy stuff from an off-screen pixmap onto the screen (we know
-     * that there's no problem with obscured areas).
+     * Note: GraphicsExpose events are disabled in GC's because they're used
+     * to copy stuff from an off-screen pixmap onto the screen (we know that
+     * there's no problem with obscured areas).
      */
 
     gcValues.graphics_exposures = False;
@@ -735,8 +723,8 @@ TkMenuButtonWorldChanged(instanceData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Allocate the disabled graphics context, for drawing text in
-     * its disabled state.
+     * Allocate the disabled graphics context, for drawing text in its
+     * disabled state.
      */
 
     mask = GCForeground | GCBackground | GCFont;
@@ -768,31 +756,31 @@ TkMenuButtonWorldChanged(instanceData)
  *
  * MenuButtonEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various
- *	events on buttons.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various events on
+ *	buttons.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up.
+ *	When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-MenuButtonEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+MenuButtonEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
     TkMenuButton *mbPtr = (TkMenuButton *) clientData;
     if ((eventPtr->type == Expose) && (eventPtr->xexpose.count == 0)) {
 	goto redraw;
     } else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) {
 	/*
-	 * Must redraw after size changes, since layout could have changed
-	 * and borders will need to be redrawn.
+	 * Must redraw after size changes, since layout could have changed and
+	 * borders will need to be redrawn.
 	 */
 
 	goto redraw;
@@ -815,7 +803,7 @@ MenuButtonEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
     }
     return;
 
-    redraw:
+  redraw:
     if ((mbPtr->tkwin != NULL) && !(mbPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(TkpDisplayMenuButton, (ClientData) mbPtr);
 	mbPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
@@ -827,9 +815,9 @@ MenuButtonEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * MenuButtonCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted.  If
- *	the widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed,
- *	this command destroys it.
+ *	This function is invoked when a widget command is deleted. If the
+ *	widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed, this command
+ *	destroys it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -841,17 +829,17 @@ MenuButtonEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-MenuButtonCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
+MenuButtonCmdDeletedProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
 {
     TkMenuButton *mbPtr = (TkMenuButton *) clientData;
     Tk_Window tkwin = mbPtr->tkwin;
 
     /*
-     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was
-     * destroyed and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin
-     * is NULL) or because the command was deleted, and then this procedure
-     * destroys the widget.
+     * This function could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
+     * and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin is NULL) or
+     * because the command was deleted, and then this function destroys the
+     * widget.
      */
 
     if (tkwin != NULL) {
@@ -864,8 +852,8 @@ MenuButtonCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  *
  * MenuButtonTextVarProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when someone changes the variable
- *	whose contents are to be displayed in a menu button.
+ *	This function is invoked when someone changes the variable whose
+ *	contents are to be displayed in a menu button.
  *
  * Results:
  *	NULL is always returned.
@@ -879,19 +867,20 @@ MenuButtonCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static char *
-MenuButtonTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about button. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter containing variable. */
-    CONST char *name1;		/* Name of variable. */
-    CONST char *name2;		/* Second part of variable name. */
-    int flags;			/* Information about what happened. */
+MenuButtonTextVarProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about button. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter containing variable. */
+    CONST char *name1,		/* Name of variable. */
+    CONST char *name2,		/* Second part of variable name. */
+    int flags)			/* Information about what happened. */
 {
     register TkMenuButton *mbPtr = (TkMenuButton *) clientData;
     CONST char *value;
+    unsigned len;
 
     /*
-     * If the variable is unset, then immediately recreate it unless
-     * the whole interpreter is going away.
+     * If the variable is unset, then immediately recreate it unless the whole
+     * interpreter is going away.
      */
 
     if (flags & TCL_TRACE_UNSETS) {
@@ -902,7 +891,7 @@ MenuButtonTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
 		    TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
 		    MenuButtonTextVarProc, clientData);
 	}
-	return (char *) NULL;
+	return NULL;
     }
 
     value = Tcl_GetVar(interp, mbPtr->textVarName, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
@@ -912,8 +901,9 @@ MenuButtonTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
     if (mbPtr->text != NULL) {
 	ckfree(mbPtr->text);
     }
-    mbPtr->text = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (strlen(value) + 1));
-    strcpy(mbPtr->text, value);
+    len = 1 + (unsigned) strlen(value);
+    mbPtr->text = (char *) ckalloc(len);
+    memcpy(mbPtr->text, value, len);
     TkpComputeMenuButtonGeometry(mbPtr);
 
     if ((mbPtr->tkwin != NULL) && Tk_IsMapped(mbPtr->tkwin)
@@ -921,7 +911,7 @@ MenuButtonTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(TkpDisplayMenuButton, (ClientData) mbPtr);
 	mbPtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
     }
-    return (char *) NULL;
+    return NULL;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -929,9 +919,9 @@ MenuButtonTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
  *
  * MenuButtonImageProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the image code whenever the manager
- *	for an image does something that affects the size of contents
- *	of an image displayed in a button.
+ *	This function is invoked by the image code whenever the manager for an
+ *	image does something that affects the size of contents of an image
+ *	displayed in a button.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -943,13 +933,13 @@ MenuButtonTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
  */
 
 static void
-MenuButtonImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth, imgHeight)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to widget record. */
-    int x, y;				/* Upper left pixel (within image)
-					 * that must be redisplayed. */
-    int width, height;			/* Dimensions of area to redisplay
-					 * (may be <= 0). */
-    int imgWidth, imgHeight;		/* New dimensions of image. */
+MenuButtonImageProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to widget record. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
+				 * be redisplayed. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of area to redisplay (may be <=
+				 * 0). */
+    int imgWidth, int imgHeight)/* New dimensions of image. */
 {
     register TkMenuButton *mbPtr = (TkMenuButton *) clientData;
 
@@ -961,3 +951,11 @@ MenuButtonImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth, imgHeight)
 	}
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkMenubutton.h b/generic/tkMenubutton.h
index d41e64e..4a7d340 100644
--- a/generic/tkMenubutton.h
+++ b/generic/tkMenubutton.h
@@ -1,15 +1,15 @@
 /*
  * tkMenubutton.h --
  *
- *	Declarations of types and functions used to implement
- *	the menubutton widget.
+ *	Declarations of types and functions used to implement the menubutton
+ *	widget.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkMenubutton.h,v 1.9 2003/11/17 23:12:44 hobbs Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkMenubutton.h,v 1.10 2005/11/15 15:18:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #ifndef _TKMENUBUTTON
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
  */
 
 enum direction {
-    DIRECTION_ABOVE, DIRECTION_BELOW, DIRECTION_FLUSH, 
+    DIRECTION_ABOVE, DIRECTION_BELOW, DIRECTION_FLUSH,
     DIRECTION_LEFT, DIRECTION_RIGHT
 };
 
@@ -46,16 +46,16 @@ enum state {
 };
 
 /*
- * A data structure of the following type is kept for each
- * widget managed by this file:
+ * A data structure of the following type is kept for each widget managed by
+ * this file:
  */
 
 typedef struct {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the widget.  NULL
-				 * means that the window has been destroyed
-				 * but the data structures haven't yet been
-				 * cleaned up.*/
-    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget.  Needed, among
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the widget. NULL means
+				 * that the window has been destroyed but the
+				 * data structures haven't yet been cleaned
+				 * up. */
+    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget. Needed, among
 				 * other things, so that resources can bee
 				 * freed up even after tkwin has gone away. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with menubutton. */
@@ -69,17 +69,17 @@ typedef struct {
      * Information about what's displayed in the menu button:
      */
 
-    char *text;			/* Text to display in button (malloc'ed)
-				 * or NULL. */
+    char *text;			/* Text to display in button (malloc'ed) or
+				 * NULL. */
     int underline;		/* Index of character to underline. */
-    char *textVarName;		/* Name of variable (malloc'ed) or NULL.
-				 * If non-NULL, button displays the contents
-				 * of this variable. */
-    Pixmap bitmap;		/* Bitmap to display or None.  If not None
-				 * then text and textVar and underline
-				 * are ignored. */
+    char *textVarName;		/* Name of variable (malloc'ed) or NULL. If
+				 * non-NULL, button displays the contents of
+				 * this variable. */
+    Pixmap bitmap;		/* Bitmap to display or None. If not None then
+				 * text and textVar and underline are
+				 * ignored. */
     char *imageString;		/* Name of image to display (malloc'ed), or
-				 * NULL.  If non-NULL, bitmap, text, and
+				 * NULL. If non-NULL, bitmap, text, and
 				 * textVarName are ignored. */
     Tk_Image image;		/* Image to display in window, or NULL if
 				 * none. */
@@ -90,113 +90,106 @@ typedef struct {
 
     enum state state;          	/* State of button for display purposes:
 				 * normal, active, or disabled. */
-    Tk_3DBorder normalBorder;	/* Structure used to draw 3-D
-				 * border and background when window
-				 * isn't active.  NULL means no such
-				 * border exists. */
-    Tk_3DBorder activeBorder;	/* Structure used to draw 3-D
-				 * border and background when window
-				 * is active.  NULL means no such
-				 * border exists. */
+    Tk_3DBorder normalBorder;	/* Structure used to draw 3-D border and
+				 * background when window isn't active. NULL
+				 * means no such border exists. */
+    Tk_3DBorder activeBorder;	/* Structure used to draw 3-D border and
+				 * background when window is active. NULL
+				 * means no such border exists. */
     int borderWidth;		/* Width of border. */
     int relief;			/* 3-d effect: TK_RELIEF_RAISED, etc. */
-    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw
-				 * around widget when it has the focus.
-				 * <= 0 means don't draw a highlight. */
-    XColor *highlightBgColorPtr;
-				/* Color for drawing traversal highlight
-				 * area when highlight is off. */
+    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw around
+				 * widget when it has the focus. <= 0 means
+				 * don't draw a highlight. */
+    XColor *highlightBgColorPtr;/* Color for drawing traversal highlight area
+				 * when highlight is off. */
     XColor *highlightColorPtr;	/* Color for drawing traversal highlight. */
     int inset;			/* Total width of all borders, including
 				 * traversal highlight and 3-D border.
-				 * Indicates how much interior stuff must
-				 * be offset from outside edges to leave
-				 * room for borders. */
+				 * Indicates how much interior stuff must be
+				 * offset from outside edges to leave room for
+				 * borders. */
     Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Information about text font, or NULL. */
     XColor *normalFg;		/* Foreground color in normal mode. */
     XColor *activeFg;		/* Foreground color in active mode.  NULL
 				 * means use normalFg instead. */
-    XColor *disabledFg;		/* Foreground color when disabled.  NULL
-				 * means use normalFg with a 50% stipple
-				 * instead. */
+    XColor *disabledFg;		/* Foreground color when disabled. NULL means
+				 * use normalFg with a 50% stipple instead. */
     GC normalTextGC;		/* GC for drawing text in normal mode. */
     GC activeTextGC;		/* GC for drawing text in active mode (NULL
 				 * means use normalTextGC). */
     Pixmap gray;		/* Pixmap for displaying disabled text/icon if
 				 * disabledFg is NULL. */
-    GC disabledGC;		/* Used to produce disabled effect for text. */
-    GC stippleGC;		/* Used to produce disabled stipple effect
-				 * for images when disabled. */
+    GC disabledGC;		/* Used to produce disabled effect for text */
+    GC stippleGC;		/* Used to produce disabled stipple effect for
+				 * images when disabled. */
     int leftBearing;		/* Distance from text origin to leftmost drawn
 				 * pixel (positive means to right). */
-    int rightBearing;		/* Amount text sticks right from its origin. */
+    int rightBearing;		/* Amount text sticks right from its origin */
     char *widthString;		/* Value of -width option.  Malloc'ed. */
     char *heightString;		/* Value of -height option.  Malloc'ed. */
     int width, height;		/* If > 0, these specify dimensions to request
 				 * for window, in characters for text and in
-				 * pixels for bitmaps.  In this case the actual
+				 * pixels for bitmaps. In this case the actual
 				 * size of the text string or bitmap is
-				 * ignored in computing desired window size. */
+				 * ignored in computing desired window size */
     int wrapLength;		/* Line length (in pixels) at which to wrap
-				 * onto next line.  <= 0 means don't wrap
+				 * onto next line. <= 0 means don't wrap
 				 * except at newlines. */
     int padX, padY;		/* Extra space around text or bitmap (pixels
 				 * on each side). */
     Tk_Anchor anchor;		/* Where text/bitmap should be displayed
 				 * inside window region. */
-    Tk_Justify justify;		/* Justification to use for multi-line text. */
+    Tk_Justify justify;		/* Justification to use for multi-line text */
     int textWidth;		/* Width needed to display text as requested,
 				 * in pixels. */
     int textHeight;		/* Height needed to display text as requested,
 				 * in pixels. */
     Tk_TextLayout textLayout;	/* Saved text layout information. */
-    int indicatorOn;		/* Non-zero means display indicator;  0 means
+    int indicatorOn;		/* Non-zero means display indicator; 0 means
 				 * don't display. */
-    int indicatorHeight;	/* Height of indicator in pixels.  This same
+    int indicatorHeight;	/* Height of indicator in pixels. This same
 				 * amount of extra space is also left on each
-				 * side of the indicator. 0 if no indicator. */
+				 * side of the indicator. 0 if no indicator */
     int indicatorWidth;		/* Width of indicator in pixels, including
-				 * indicatorHeight in padding on each side.
-				 * 0 if no indicator. */
+				 * indicatorHeight in padding on each side. 0
+				 * if no indicator. */
 
     /*
      * Miscellaneous information:
      */
 
-    int compound;               /* Value of -compound option; specifies whether
-                                 * the menubutton should show both an image and
-                                 * text, and, if so, how. */
-
-    enum direction direction;	/* Direction for where to pop the menu.
-    				 * Valid directions are "above", "below",
-    				 * "left", "right", and "flush". "flush"
-    				 * means that the upper left corner of the
-    				 * menubutton is where the menu pops up.
-    				 * "above" and "below" will attempt to pop
-    				 * the menu compleletly above or below
-    				 * the menu respectively.
-    				 * "left" and "right" will pop the menu
-    				 * left or right, and the active item
-    				 * will be next to the button. */
+    int compound;               /* Value of -compound option; specifies
+                                 * whether the menubutton should show both an
+                                 * image and text, and, if so, how. */
+
+    enum direction direction;	/* Direction for where to pop the menu. Valid
+    				 * directions are "above", "below", "left",
+    				 * "right", and "flush". "flush" means that
+    				 * the upper left corner of the menubutton is
+    				 * where the menu pops up. "above" and "below"
+    				 * will attempt to pop the menu compleletly
+    				 * above or below the menu respectively.
+    				 * "left" and "right" will pop the menu left
+    				 * or right, and the active item will be next
+    				 * to the button. */
     Tk_Cursor cursor;		/* Current cursor for window, or None. */
-    char *takeFocus;		/* Value of -takefocus option;  not used in
-				 * the C code, but used by keyboard traversal
-				 * scripts.  Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
-    int flags;			/* Various flags;  see below for
-				 * definitions. */
+    char *takeFocus;		/* Value of -takefocus option; not used in the
+				 * C code, but used by keyboard traversal
+				 * scripts. Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
+    int flags;			/* Various flags; see below for definitions */
 } TkMenuButton;
 
 /*
  * Flag bits for buttons:
  *
- * REDRAW_PENDING:		Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler
- *				has already been queued to redraw
- *				this window.
- * POSTED:			Non-zero means that the menu associated
- *				with this button has been posted (typically
- *				because of an active button press).
- * GOT_FOCUS:			Non-zero means this button currently
- *				has the input focus.
+ * REDRAW_PENDING:		Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler has
+ *				already been queued to redraw this window.
+ * POSTED:			Non-zero means that the menu associated with
+ *				this button has been posted (typically because
+ *				of an active button press).
+ * GOT_FOCUS:			Non-zero means this button currently has the
+ *				input focus.
  */
 
 #define REDRAW_PENDING		1
@@ -205,7 +198,7 @@ typedef struct {
 
 /*
  * The following constants define the dimensions of the cascade indicator,
- * which is displayed if the "-indicatoron" option is true.  The units for
+ * which is displayed if the "-indicatoron" option is true. The units for
  * these options are 1/10 millimeters.
  */
 
@@ -219,19 +212,14 @@ typedef struct {
 extern Tk_ClassProcs tkpMenubuttonClass;
 
 /*
- * Declaration of procedures used in the implementation of the button
- * widget. 
+ * Declaration of procedures used in the implementation of the button widget.
  */
 
-EXTERN void		TkpComputeMenuButtonGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkMenuButton *mbPtr));
-EXTERN TkMenuButton *	TkpCreateMenuButton _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
-EXTERN void		TkpDisplayMenuButton _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-EXTERN void 		TkpDestroyMenuButton _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkMenuButton *mbPtr));
-EXTERN void		TkMenuButtonWorldChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData instanceData));
+EXTERN void		TkpComputeMenuButtonGeometry(TkMenuButton *mbPtr);
+EXTERN TkMenuButton *	TkpCreateMenuButton(Tk_Window tkwin);
+EXTERN void		TkpDisplayMenuButton(ClientData clientData);
+EXTERN void 		TkpDestroyMenuButton(TkMenuButton *mbPtr);
+EXTERN void		TkMenuButtonWorldChanged(ClientData instanceData);
 
 # undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
 # define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
diff --git a/generic/tkPanedWindow.c b/generic/tkPanedWindow.c
index e4a6625..36002b4 100644
--- a/generic/tkPanedWindow.c
+++ b/generic/tkPanedWindow.c
@@ -1,25 +1,26 @@
 /*
  * tkPanedWindow.c --
  *
- *	This module implements "paned window" widgets that are object
- *	based.  A "paned window" is a widget that manages the geometry for
- *	some number of other widgets, placing a movable "sash" between them,
- *	which can be used to alter the relative sizes of adjacent widgets.
+ *	This module implements "paned window" widgets that are object based. A
+ *	"paned window" is a widget that manages the geometry for some number
+ *	of other widgets, placing a movable "sash" between them, which can be
+ *	used to alter the relative sizes of adjacent widgets.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkPanedWindow.c,v 1.23 2005/05/31 05:23:44 hobbs Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkPanedWindow.c,v 1.24 2005/11/15 15:18:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkPort.h"
 #include "default.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
-/* Flag values for "sticky"ness  The 16 combinations subsume the packer's
+/*
+ * Flag values for "sticky"ness. The 16 combinations subsume the packer's
  * notion of anchor and fill.
  *
  * STICK_NORTH  	This window sticks to the top of its cavity.
@@ -38,7 +39,7 @@
  */
 
 static char *orientStrings[] = {
-    "horizontal", "vertical", (char *) NULL
+    "horizontal", "vertical", NULL
 };
 
 enum orient { ORIENT_HORIZONTAL, ORIENT_VERTICAL };
@@ -48,7 +49,7 @@ enum orient { ORIENT_HORIZONTAL, ORIENT_VERTICAL };
  */
 
 static char *stretchStrings[] = {
-    "always", "first", "last", "middle", "never", (char *) NULL
+    "always", "first", "last", "middle", "never", NULL
 };
 
 enum stretch {
@@ -81,37 +82,38 @@ typedef struct {
  */
 
 typedef struct Slave {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window being managed. */
-
-    int minSize;			/* Minimum size of this pane, on the
-					 * relevant axis, in pixels. */
-    int padx;				/* Additional padding requested for
-					 * slave, in the x dimension. */
-    int pady;				/* Additional padding requested for
-					 * slave, in the y dimension. */
-    Tcl_Obj *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* Tcl_Obj rep's of slave width/height,
-					 * to allow for null values. */
-    int width;				/* Slave width. */
-    int height;				/* Slave height. */
-    int sticky;				/* Sticky string. */
-    int x, y;				/* Coordinates of the widget. */
-    int paneWidth, paneHeight;		/* Pane dimensions (may be different
-					 * from slave width/height). */
-    int sashx, sashy;			/* Coordinates of the sash of the
-					 * right or bottom of this pane. */
-    int markx, marky;			/* Coordinates of the last mark set
-					 * for the sash. */
-    int handlex, handley;		/* Coordinates of the sash handle. */
-    enum stretch stretch;		/* Controls how slave grows/shrinks */
-    int hide;				/* Controls visibility of pane */
-    struct PanedWindow *masterPtr;	/* Paned window managing the window. */
-    Tk_Window after;			/* Placeholder for parsing options. */
-    Tk_Window before;			/* Placeholder for parsing options. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window being managed. */
+    int minSize;		/* Minimum size of this pane, on the relevant
+				 * axis, in pixels. */
+    int padx;			/* Additional padding requested for slave, in
+				 * the x dimension. */
+    int pady;			/* Additional padding requested for slave, in
+				 * the y dimension. */
+    Tcl_Obj *widthPtr, *heightPtr;
+				/* Tcl_Obj rep's of slave width/height, to
+				 * allow for null values. */
+    int width;			/* Slave width. */
+    int height;			/* Slave height. */
+    int sticky;			/* Sticky string. */
+    int x, y;			/* Coordinates of the widget. */
+    int paneWidth, paneHeight;	/* Pane dimensions (may be different from
+				 * slave width/height). */
+    int sashx, sashy;		/* Coordinates of the sash of the right or
+				 * bottom of this pane. */
+    int markx, marky;		/* Coordinates of the last mark set for the
+				 * sash. */
+    int handlex, handley;	/* Coordinates of the sash handle. */
+    enum stretch stretch;	/* Controls how slave grows/shrinks */
+    int hide;			/* Controls visibility of pane */
+    struct PanedWindow *masterPtr;
+				/* Paned window managing the window. */
+    Tk_Window after;		/* Placeholder for parsing options. */
+    Tk_Window before;		/* Placeholder for parsing options. */
 } Slave;
 
 /*
- * A data structure of the following type is kept for each paned window
- * widget managed by this file:
+ * A data structure of the following type is kept for each paned window widget
+ * managed by this file:
  */
 
 typedef struct PanedWindow {
@@ -133,7 +135,6 @@ typedef struct PanedWindow {
     Tk_Cursor cursor;		/* Current cursor for window, or None. */
     int resizeOpaque;		/* Boolean indicating whether resize should be
 				 * opaque or rubberband style. */
-
     int sashRelief;		/* Relief used to draw sash. */
     int sashWidth;		/* Width of each sash, in pixels. */
     Tcl_Obj *sashWidthPtr;	/* Tcl_Obj rep for sash width. */
@@ -146,7 +147,6 @@ typedef struct PanedWindow {
     int handlePad;		/* Distance from border to draw handle. */
     Tcl_Obj *handleSizePtr;	/* Tcl_Obj rep for handle size. */
     Tk_Cursor sashCursor;	/* Cursor used when mouse is above a sash. */
-
     GC gc;			/* Graphics context for copying from
 				 * off-screen pixmap onto screen. */
     int proxyx, proxyy;		/* Proxy x,y coordinates. */
@@ -159,11 +159,11 @@ typedef struct PanedWindow {
 /*
  * Flags used for paned windows:
  *
- * REDRAW_PENDING:		Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler has
- *				been queued to redraw this window.
+ * REDRAW_PENDING:		Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler has been
+ *				queued to redraw this window.
  *
- * WIDGET_DELETED:		Non-zero means that the paned window has
- *				been, or is in the process of being, deleted.
+ * WIDGET_DELETED:		Non-zero means that the paned window has been,
+ *				or is in the process of being, deleted.
  *
  * RESIZE_PENDING:		Non-zero means that the window might need to
  *				change its size (or the size of its panes)
@@ -179,59 +179,63 @@ typedef struct PanedWindow {
 #define RESIZE_PENDING		0x0020
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-int		Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]));
-static void	PanedWindowCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static int	ConfigurePanedWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			PanedWindow *pwPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void	DestroyPanedWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((PanedWindow *pwPtr));
-static void	DisplayPanedWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void	PanedWindowEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void	ProxyWindowEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void	DisplayProxyWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void	PanedWindowWorldChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData instanceData));
-static int	PanedWindowWidgetObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tcl_Interp *, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]));
-static void	PanedWindowLostSlaveProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void	PanedWindowReqProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void	ArrangePanes _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void	Unlink _ANSI_ARGS_((Slave *slavePtr));
-static Slave *	GetPane _ANSI_ARGS_((PanedWindow *pwPtr, Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void	SlaveStructureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			XEvent *eventPtr));
-static int	PanedWindowSashCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((PanedWindow *pwPtr,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]));
-static int	PanedWindowProxyCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((PanedWindow *pwPtr,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]));
-static void	ComputeGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((PanedWindow *pwPtr));
-static int	ConfigureSlaves _ANSI_ARGS_((PanedWindow *pwPtr,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]));
-static void	DestroyOptionTables _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp));
-static int	SetSticky _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
-			Tcl_Obj **value, char *recordPtr, int internalOffset,
-			char *oldInternalPtr, int flags));
-static Tcl_Obj *GetSticky _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
-			char *recordPtr, int internalOffset));
-static void	RestoreSticky _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tk_Window tkwin, char *internalPtr,
-			char *oldInternalPtr));
-static void	AdjustForSticky _ANSI_ARGS_((int sticky, int cavityWidth,
-			int cavityHeight, int *xPtr, int *yPtr,
-			int *slaveWidthPtr, int *slaveHeightPtr));
-static void	MoveSash _ANSI_ARGS_((PanedWindow *pwPtr, int sash, int diff));
-static int	ObjectIsEmpty _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static char *	ComputeSlotAddress _ANSI_ARGS_((char *recordPtr, int offset));
-static int	PanedWindowIdentifyCoords _ANSI_ARGS_((PanedWindow *pwPtr,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int x, int y));
+int			Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		PanedWindowCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static int		ConfigurePanedWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    PanedWindow *pwPtr, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		DestroyPanedWindow(PanedWindow *pwPtr);
+static void		DisplayPanedWindow(ClientData clientData);
+static void		PanedWindowEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		ProxyWindowEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		DisplayProxyWindow(ClientData clientData);
+static void		PanedWindowWorldChanged(ClientData instanceData);
+static int		PanedWindowWidgetObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]);
+static void		PanedWindowLostSlaveProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		PanedWindowReqProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		ArrangePanes(ClientData clientData);
+static void		Unlink(Slave *slavePtr);
+static Slave *		GetPane(PanedWindow *pwPtr, Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		SlaveStructureProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static int		PanedWindowSashCommand(PanedWindow *pwPtr,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]);
+static int		PanedWindowProxyCommand(PanedWindow *pwPtr,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]);
+static void		ComputeGeometry(PanedWindow *pwPtr);
+static int		ConfigureSlaves(PanedWindow *pwPtr,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]);
+static void		DestroyOptionTables(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp);
+static int		SetSticky(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj **value, char *recordPtr,
+			    int internalOffset, char *oldInternalPtr,
+			    int flags);
+static Tcl_Obj *	GetSticky(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    char *recordPtr, int internalOffset);
+static void		RestoreSticky(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    char *internalPtr, char *oldInternalPtr);
+static void		AdjustForSticky(int sticky, int cavityWidth,
+			    int cavityHeight, int *xPtr, int *yPtr,
+			    int *slaveWidthPtr, int *slaveHeightPtr);
+static void		MoveSash(PanedWindow *pwPtr, int sash, int diff);
+static int		ObjectIsEmpty(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static char *		ComputeSlotAddress(char *recordPtr, int offset);
+static int		PanedWindowIdentifyCoords(PanedWindow *pwPtr,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int x, int y);
 
 /*
  * Sashes are between panes only, so there is one less sash than slaves
@@ -258,11 +262,11 @@ static Tk_GeomMgr panedWindowMgrType = {
  */
 
 static Tk_ObjCustomOption stickyOption = {
-    "sticky",				/* name */
-    SetSticky,				/* setProc */
-    GetSticky,				/* getProc */
-    RestoreSticky,			/* restoreProc */
-    (Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc *)NULL,	/* freeProc */
+    "sticky",			/* name */
+    SetSticky,			/* setProc */
+    GetSticky,			/* getProc */
+    RestoreSticky,		/* restoreProc */
+    NULL,			/* freeProc */
     0
 };
 
@@ -270,10 +274,10 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, background), 0,
 	 (ClientData) DEF_PANEDWINDOW_BG_MONO},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	 (char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth"},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	 (char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background"},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL,
+	 NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth"},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL,
+	 NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background"},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_BORDERWIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(PanedWindow, borderWidth),
 	 0, 0, GEOMETRY},
@@ -319,43 +323,42 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
 };
 
 static Tk_OptionSpec slaveOptionSpecs[] = {
-    {TK_OPTION_WINDOW, "-after", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_WINDOW, "-after", NULL, NULL,
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_AFTER, -1, Tk_Offset(Slave, after),
 	 TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_WINDOW, "-before", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_WINDOW, "-before", NULL, NULL,
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_BEFORE, -1, Tk_Offset(Slave, before),
 	 TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", NULL, NULL,
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_HEIGHT, Tk_Offset(Slave, heightPtr),
 	 Tk_Offset(Slave, height), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-hide", "hide", "Hide",
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_HIDE, -1, Tk_Offset(Slave, hide), 0,0,GEOMETRY},
-    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-minsize", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-minsize", NULL, NULL,
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_MINSIZE, -1, Tk_Offset(Slave, minSize), 0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", NULL, NULL,
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_PADX, -1, Tk_Offset(Slave, padx), 0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", NULL, NULL,
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_PADY, -1, Tk_Offset(Slave, pady), 0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-sticky", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, "-sticky", NULL, NULL,
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_STICKY, -1, Tk_Offset(Slave, sticky), 0,
 	 (ClientData) &stickyOption, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-stretch", "stretch", "Stretch",
 	DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_STRETCH, -1, Tk_Offset(Slave, stretch), 0,
 	(ClientData) stretchStrings, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-width", NULL, NULL,
 	 DEF_PANEDWINDOW_PANE_WIDTH, Tk_Offset(Slave, widthPtr),
 	 Tk_Offset(Slave, width), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_END}
 };
-
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "panedwindow" Tcl
- *	command.  It creates a new "panedwindow" widget.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "panedwindow" Tcl command. It
+ *	creates a new "panedwindow" widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -367,11 +370,11 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec slaveOptionSpecs[] = {
  */
 
 int
-Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* NULL. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* NULL. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     PanedWindow *pwPtr;
     Tk_Window tkwin, parent;
@@ -384,7 +387,7 @@ Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
-	    Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[1], NULL), (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[1], NULL), NULL);
     if (tkwin == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
@@ -393,17 +396,25 @@ Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, "PanedWindowOptionTables", NULL);
     if (pwOpts == NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * The first time this procedure is invoked, the option tables will
-	 * be NULL.  We then create the option tables from the templates
-	 * and store a pointer to the tables as the command's clinical so
-	 * we'll have easy access to it in the future.
+	 * The first time this function is invoked, the option tables will be
+	 * NULL. We then create the option tables from the templates and store
+	 * a pointer to the tables as the command's clinical so we'll have
+	 * easy access to it in the future.
 	 */
+
 	pwOpts = (OptionTables *) ckalloc(sizeof(OptionTables));
-	/* Set up an exit handler to free the optionTables struct */
+
+	/*
+	 * Set up an exit handler to free the optionTables struct.
+	 */
+
 	Tcl_SetAssocData(interp, "PanedWindowOptionTables",
 		DestroyOptionTables, (ClientData) pwOpts);
 
-	/* Create the paned window option tables. */
+	/*
+	 * Create the paned window option tables.
+	 */
+
 	pwOpts->pwOptions = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs);
 	pwOpts->slaveOpts = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, slaveOptionSpecs);
     }
@@ -416,18 +427,18 @@ Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
     pwPtr = (PanedWindow *) ckalloc(sizeof(PanedWindow));
     memset((void *)pwPtr, 0, (sizeof(PanedWindow)));
-    pwPtr->tkwin	= tkwin;
-    pwPtr->display	= Tk_Display(tkwin);
-    pwPtr->interp	= interp;
-    pwPtr->widgetCmd	= Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
+    pwPtr->tkwin = tkwin;
+    pwPtr->display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    pwPtr->interp = interp;
+    pwPtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
 	    Tk_PathName(pwPtr->tkwin), PanedWindowWidgetObjCmd,
 	    (ClientData) pwPtr, PanedWindowCmdDeletedProc);
-    pwPtr->optionTable	= pwOpts->pwOptions;
-    pwPtr->slaveOpts	= pwOpts->slaveOpts;
-    pwPtr->relief	= TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
-    pwPtr->gc		= None;
-    pwPtr->cursor	= None;
-    pwPtr->sashCursor	= None;
+    pwPtr->optionTable = pwOpts->pwOptions;
+    pwPtr->slaveOpts = pwOpts->slaveOpts;
+    pwPtr->relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    pwPtr->gc = None;
+    pwPtr->cursor = None;
+    pwPtr->sashCursor = None;
 
     /*
      * Keep a hold of the associated tkwin until we destroy the widget,
@@ -446,10 +457,11 @@ Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    PanedWindowEventProc, (ClientData) pwPtr);
 
     /*
-     * Find the toplevel ancestor of the panedwindow, and make a proxy
-     * win as a child of that window; this way the proxy can always float
-     * above slaves in the panedwindow.
+     * Find the toplevel ancestor of the panedwindow, and make a proxy win as
+     * a child of that window; this way the proxy can always float above
+     * slaves in the panedwindow.
      */
+
     parent = Tk_Parent(pwPtr->tkwin);
     while (!(Tk_IsTopLevel(parent))) {
 	parent = Tk_Parent(parent);
@@ -459,15 +471,16 @@ Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
     }
 
-    pwPtr->proxywin = Tk_CreateAnonymousWindow(interp, parent, (char *) NULL);
+    pwPtr->proxywin = Tk_CreateAnonymousWindow(interp, parent, NULL);
+
     /*
-     * The proxy window has to be able to share GCs with the main
-     * panedwindow despite being children of windows with potentially
-     * different characteristics, and it looks better that way too.
-     * [Bug 702230]
-     * Also Set the X window save under attribute to avoid expose events as
-     * the proxy sash is dragged across the panes.  [Bug 1036963]
+     * The proxy window has to be able to share GCs with the main panedwindow
+     * despite being children of windows with potentially different
+     * characteristics, and it looks better that way too. [Bug 702230] Also
+     * set the X window save under attribute to avoid expose events as the
+     * proxy sash is dragged across the panes. [Bug 1036963]
      */
+
     Tk_SetWindowVisual(pwPtr->proxywin,
 	    Tk_Visual(tkwin), Tk_Depth(tkwin), Tk_Colormap(tkwin));
     Tk_CreateEventHandler(pwPtr->proxywin, ExposureMask, ProxyWindowEventProc,
@@ -490,9 +503,9 @@ Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * PanedWindowWidgetObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to a widget managed by this module.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a widget managed by this module. See the user documentation for
+ *	details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -504,17 +517,17 @@ Tk_PanedWindowObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-PanedWindowWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Information about square widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[];		/* Argument objects. */
+PanedWindowWidgetObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about square widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     PanedWindow *pwPtr = (PanedWindow *) clientData;
     int result = TCL_OK;
     static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
 	"add", "cget", "configure", "forget", "identify", "panecget",
-	"paneconfigure", "panes", "proxy", "sash", (char *) NULL
+	"paneconfigure", "panes", "proxy", "sash", NULL
     };
     enum options {
 	PW_ADD, PW_CGET, PW_CONFIGURE, PW_FORGET, PW_IDENTIFY, PW_PANECGET,
@@ -567,7 +580,7 @@ PanedWindowWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	if (objc <= 3) {
 	    resultObj = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) pwPtr,
 		    pwPtr->optionTable,
-		    (objc == 3) ? objv[2] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL, pwPtr->tkwin);
+		    (objc == 3) ? objv[2] : NULL, pwPtr->tkwin);
 	    if (resultObj == NULL) {
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    } else {
@@ -599,7 +612,7 @@ PanedWindowWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    slavePtr = GetPane(pwPtr, slave);
 	    if ((slavePtr != NULL) && (slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL)) {
 		count++;
-		Tk_ManageGeometry(slave, (Tk_GeomMgr *)NULL, (ClientData)NULL);
+		Tk_ManageGeometry(slave, NULL, (ClientData)NULL);
 		Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin, pwPtr->tkwin);
 		Tk_DeleteEventHandler(slavePtr->tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
 			SlaveStructureProc, (ClientData) slavePtr);
@@ -672,7 +685,7 @@ PanedWindowWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		if (pwPtr->slaves[i]->tkwin == tkwin) {
 		    resultObj = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp,
 			    (char *) pwPtr->slaves[i], pwPtr->slaveOpts,
-			    (objc == 4) ? objv[3] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
+			    (objc == 4) ? objv[3] : NULL,
 			    pwPtr->tkwin);
 		    if (resultObj == NULL) {
 			result = TCL_ERROR;
@@ -717,25 +730,24 @@ PanedWindowWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * ConfigureSlaves --
  *
- *	Add or alter the configuration options of a slave in a paned
- *	window.
+ *	Add or alter the configuration options of a slave in a paned window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Depends on options; may add a slave to the paned window, may
- *	alter the geometry management options of a slave.
+ *	Depends on options; may add a slave to the paned window, may alter the
+ *	geometry management options of a slave.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
-    PanedWindow *pwPtr;			/* Information about paned window. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[];		/* Argument objects. */
+ConfigureSlaves(
+    PanedWindow *pwPtr,		/* Information about paned window. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     int i, firstOptionArg, j, found, doubleBw, index, numNewSlaves, haveLoc;
     int insertIndex;
@@ -745,11 +757,11 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     char *arg;
 
     /*
-     * Find the non-window name arguments; these are the configure options
-     * for the slaves.  Also validate that the window names given are
-     * legitimate (ie, they are real windows, they are not the panedwindow
-     * itself, etc.).
+     * Find the non-window name arguments; these are the configure options for
+     * the slaves. Also validate that the window names given are legitimate
+     * (ie, they are real windows, they are not the panedwindow itself, etc.).
      */
+
     for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
 	arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
 	if (arg[0] == '-') {
@@ -761,28 +773,32 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 		 * Just a plain old bad window; Tk_NameToWindow filled in an
 		 * error message for us.
 		 */
+
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    } else if (tkwin == pwPtr->tkwin) {
 		/*
 		 * A panedwindow cannot manage itself.
 		 */
+
 		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't add ", arg, " to itself",
-			(char *) NULL);
+			NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    } else if (Tk_IsTopLevel(tkwin)) {
 		/*
 		 * A panedwindow cannot manage a toplevel.
 		 */
+
 		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't add toplevel ", arg, " to ",
-			Tk_PathName(pwPtr->tkwin), (char *) NULL);
+			Tk_PathName(pwPtr->tkwin), NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    } else {
 		/*
 		 * Make sure the panedwindow is the parent of the slave,
 		 * or a descendant of the slave's parent.
 		 */
+
 		parent = Tk_Parent(tkwin);
 		for (ancestor = pwPtr->tkwin;;ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) {
 		    if (ancestor == parent) {
@@ -790,9 +806,8 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 		    }
 		    if (Tk_IsTopLevel(ancestor)) {
 			Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't add ", arg,
-				" to ", Tk_PathName(pwPtr->tkwin),
-				(char *) NULL);
+			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't add ", arg, " to ",
+				Tk_PathName(pwPtr->tkwin), NULL);
 			return TCL_ERROR;
 		    }
 		}
@@ -803,10 +818,11 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 
     /*
      * Pre-parse the configuration options, to get the before/after specifiers
-     * into an easy-to-find location (a local variable).  Also, check the
+     * into an easy-to-find location (a local variable). Also, check the
      * return from Tk_SetOptions once, here, so we can save a little bit of
      * extra testing in the for loop below.
      */
+
     memset((void *)&options, 0, sizeof(Slave));
     if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) &options, pwPtr->slaveOpts,
 	    objc - firstOptionArg, objv + firstOptionArg,
@@ -816,9 +832,10 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 
     /*
      * If either -after or -before was given, find the numerical index that
-     * corresponds to the given window.  If both -after and -before are
-     * given, the option precedence is:  -after, then -before.
+     * corresponds to the given window. If both -after and -before are given,
+     * the option precedence is: -after, then -before.
      */
+
     index = -1;
     haveLoc = 0;
     if (options.after != None) {
@@ -842,14 +859,14 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If a window was given for -after/-before, but it's not a window
-     * managed by the panedwindow, throw an error
+     * If a window was given for -after/-before, but it's not a window managed
+     * by the panedwindow, throw an error
      */
+
     if (haveLoc && index == -1) {
 	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window \"", Tk_PathName(tkwin),
-		"\" is not managed by ", Tk_PathName(pwPtr->tkwin),
-		(char *) NULL);
+		"\" is not managed by ", Tk_PathName(pwPtr->tkwin), NULL);
 	Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) &options, pwPtr->slaveOpts,
 		pwPtr->tkwin);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -857,23 +874,26 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 
     /*
      * Allocate an array to hold, in order, the pointers to the slave
-     * structures corresponding to the windows specified.  Some of those
+     * structures corresponding to the windows specified. Some of those
      * structures may already have existed, some may be new.
      */
+
     inserts = (Slave **)ckalloc(sizeof(Slave *) * (firstOptionArg - 2));
     insertIndex = 0;
 
     /*
      * Populate the inserts array, creating new slave structures as necessary,
      * applying the options to each structure as we go, and, if necessary,
-     * marking the spot in the original slaves array as empty (for pre-existing
-     * slave structures).
+     * marking the spot in the original slaves array as empty (for
+     * pre-existing slave structures).
      */
+
     for (i = 0, numNewSlaves = 0; i < firstOptionArg - 2; i++) {
 	/*
 	 * We don't check that tkwin is NULL here, because the pre-pass above
 	 * guarantees that the input at this stage is good.
 	 */
+
 	tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[i + 2]),
 		pwPtr->tkwin);
 
@@ -907,8 +927,8 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 
 	/*
 	 * Make sure this slave wasn't already put into the inserts array,
-	 * ie, when the user specifies the same window multiple times in
-	 * a single add commaned.
+	 * i.e., when the user specifies the same window multiple times in a
+	 * single add commaned.
 	 */
 	for (j = 0; j < insertIndex; j++) {
 	    if (inserts[j]->tkwin == tkwin) {
@@ -921,8 +941,8 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Create a new slave structure and initialize it.  All slaves
-	 * start out with their "natural" dimensions.
+	 * Create a new slave structure and initialize it. All slaves start
+	 * out with their "natural" dimensions.
 	 */
 
 	slavePtr = (Slave *) ckalloc(sizeof(Slave));
@@ -932,8 +952,8 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *)slavePtr, pwPtr->slaveOpts,
 		objc - firstOptionArg, objv + firstOptionArg,
 		pwPtr->tkwin, NULL, NULL);
-	slavePtr->tkwin		= tkwin;
-	slavePtr->masterPtr	= pwPtr;
+	slavePtr->tkwin = tkwin;
+	slavePtr->masterPtr = pwPtr;
 	doubleBw = 2 * Tk_Changes(slavePtr->tkwin)->border_width;
 	if (slavePtr->width > 0) {
 	    slavePtr->paneWidth = slavePtr->width;
@@ -962,9 +982,9 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Allocate the new slaves array, then copy the slaves into it, in
-     * order.
+     * Allocate the new slaves array, then copy the slaves into it, in order.
      */
+
     i = sizeof(Slave *) * (pwPtr->numSlaves+numNewSlaves);
     new = (Slave **)ckalloc((unsigned) i);
     memset(new, 0, (size_t) i);
@@ -981,11 +1001,12 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	/*
 	 * If some of the existing slaves were moved, the old slaves array
 	 * will be partially populated, with some valid and some invalid
-	 * entries.  Walk through it, copying valid entries to the new slaves
+	 * entries. Walk through it, copying valid entries to the new slaves
 	 * array as we go; when we get to the insert location for the new
 	 * slaves, copy the inserts array over, then finish off the old slaves
 	 * array.
 	 */
+
 	for (i = 0, j = 0; i < index; i++) {
 	    if (pwPtr->slaves[i] != NULL) {
 		new[j] = pwPtr->slaves[i];
@@ -1007,6 +1028,7 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     /*
      * Make the new slaves array the paned window's slave array, and clean up.
      */
+
     ckfree((void *)pwPtr->slaves);
     ckfree((void *)inserts);
     pwPtr->slaves = new;
@@ -1014,6 +1036,7 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     /*
      * Set the paned window's slave count to the new value.
      */
+
     pwPtr->numSlaves += numNewSlaves;
 
     Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) &options, pwPtr->slaveOpts, pwPtr->tkwin);
@@ -1027,7 +1050,7 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * PanedWindowSashCommand --
  *
- *	Implementation of the panedwindow sash subcommand.  See the user
+ *	Implementation of the panedwindow sash subcommand. See the user
  *	documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -1040,14 +1063,14 @@ ConfigureSlaves(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-PanedWindowSashCommand(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
-    PanedWindow *pwPtr;		/* Pointer to paned window information. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+PanedWindowSashCommand(
+    PanedWindow *pwPtr,		/* Pointer to paned window information. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     static CONST char *sashOptionStrings[] = {
-	"coord", "dragto", "mark", "place", (char *) NULL
+	"coord", "dragto", "mark", "place", NULL
     };
     enum sashOptions {
 	SASH_COORD, SASH_DRAGTO, SASH_MARK, SASH_PLACE
@@ -1061,8 +1084,8 @@ PanedWindowSashCommand(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], sashOptionStrings,
-	    "option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], sashOptionStrings, "option", 0,
+	    &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
@@ -1175,28 +1198,27 @@ PanedWindowSashCommand(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * ConfigurePanedWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an argv/argc list in
- *	conjunction with the Tk option database to configure (or
- *	reconfigure) a paned window widget.
+ *	This function is called to process an argv/argc list in conjunction
+ *	with the Tk option database to configure (or reconfigure) a paned
+ *	window widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width,
- *	etc. get set for pwPtr;  old resources get freed,
- *	if there were any.
+ *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width, etc. get set
+ *	for pwPtr; old resources get freed, if there were any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigurePanedWindow(interp, pwPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    PanedWindow *pwPtr;		/* Information about widget. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument values. */
+ConfigurePanedWindow(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    PanedWindow *pwPtr,		/* Information about widget. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument values. */
 {
     Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
     int typemask = 0;
@@ -1212,7 +1234,7 @@ ConfigurePanedWindow(interp, pwPtr, objc, objv)
     PanedWindowWorldChanged((ClientData) pwPtr);
 
     /*
-     * If an option that affects geometry has changed, make a relayout
+     * If an option that affects geometry has changed, make a re-layout
      * request.
      */
 
@@ -1228,9 +1250,9 @@ ConfigurePanedWindow(interp, pwPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * PanedWindowWorldChanged --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked anytime a paned window's world has
- *	changed in some way that causes the widget to have to recompute
- *	graphics contexts and geometry.
+ *	This function is invoked anytime a paned window's world has changed in
+ *	some way that causes the widget to have to recompute graphics contexts
+ *	and geometry.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1242,8 +1264,8 @@ ConfigurePanedWindow(interp, pwPtr, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static void
-PanedWindowWorldChanged(instanceData)
-    ClientData instanceData;	/* Information about the paned window. */
+PanedWindowWorldChanged(
+    ClientData instanceData)	/* Information about the paned window. */
 {
     XGCValues gcValues;
     GC newGC;
@@ -1286,23 +1308,23 @@ PanedWindowWorldChanged(instanceData)
  *
  * PanedWindowEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various
- *	events on paned windows.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various events on
+ *	paned windows.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up. When
+ *	it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-PanedWindowEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+PanedWindowEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
     PanedWindow *pwPtr = (PanedWindow *) clientData;
 
@@ -1327,9 +1349,9 @@ PanedWindowEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * PanedWindowCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted.  If
- *	the widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed,
- *	this command destroys it.
+ *	This function is invoked when a widget command is deleted. If the
+ *	widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed, this command
+ *	destroys it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1341,16 +1363,16 @@ PanedWindowEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-PanedWindowCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
+PanedWindowCmdDeletedProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
 {
     PanedWindow *pwPtr = (PanedWindow *) clientData;
 
     /*
-     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was
-     * destroyed and the command was then deleted or because the command was
-     * deleted, and then this procedure destroys the widget.  The
-     * WIDGET_DELETED flag distinguishes these cases.
+     * This function could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
+     * and the command was then deleted or because the command was deleted,
+     * and then this function destroys the widget. The WIDGET_DELETED flag
+     * distinguishes these cases.
      */
 
     if (!(pwPtr->flags & WIDGET_DELETED)) {
@@ -1364,9 +1386,9 @@ PanedWindowCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  *
  * DisplayPanedWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure redraws the contents of a paned window widget.
- *	It is invoked as a do-when-idle handler, so it only runs
- *	when there's nothing else for the application to do.
+ *	This function redraws the contents of a paned window widget. It is
+ *	invoked as a do-when-idle handler, so it only runs when there's
+ *	nothing else for the application to do.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1378,8 +1400,8 @@ PanedWindowCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayPanedWindow(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
+DisplayPanedWindow(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about window. */
 {
     PanedWindow *pwPtr = (PanedWindow *) clientData;
     Slave *slavePtr;
@@ -1446,13 +1468,12 @@ DisplayPanedWindow(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Copy the information from the off-screen pixmap onto the screen,
-     * then delete the pixmap.
+     * Copy the information from the off-screen pixmap onto the screen, then
+     * delete the pixmap.
      */
 
-    XCopyArea(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), pwPtr->gc,
-	    0, 0, (unsigned) Tk_Width(tkwin), (unsigned) Tk_Height(tkwin),
-	    0, 0);
+    XCopyArea(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), pwPtr->gc, 0, 0,
+	    (unsigned) Tk_Width(tkwin), (unsigned) Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, 0);
     Tk_FreePixmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap);
 }
 
@@ -1461,8 +1482,8 @@ DisplayPanedWindow(clientData)
  *
  * DestroyPanedWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by PanedWindowEventProc to free the
- *	internal structure of a paned window.
+ *	This function is invoked by PanedWindowEventProc to free the internal
+ *	structure of a paned window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1474,23 +1495,23 @@ DisplayPanedWindow(clientData)
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyPanedWindow(pwPtr)
-    PanedWindow *pwPtr;		/* Info about paned window widget. */
+DestroyPanedWindow(
+    PanedWindow *pwPtr)		/* Info about paned window widget. */
 {
     int i;
 
     /*
-     * First mark the widget as in the process of being deleted,
-     * so that any code that causes calls to other paned window procedures
-     * will abort.
+     * First mark the widget as in the process of being deleted, so that any
+     * code that causes calls to other paned window functions will abort.
      */
 
     pwPtr->flags |= WIDGET_DELETED;
 
     /*
-     * Cancel idle callbacks for redrawing the widget and for rearranging
-     * the panes.
+     * Cancel idle callbacks for redrawing the widget and for rearranging the
+     * panes.
      */
+
     if (pwPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
 	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayPanedWindow, (ClientData) pwPtr);
     }
@@ -1540,26 +1561,25 @@ DestroyPanedWindow(pwPtr)
  *
  * PanedWindowReqProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk_GeometryRequest for
- *	windows managed by a paned window.
+ *	This function is invoked by Tk_GeometryRequest for windows managed by
+ *	a paned window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Arranges for tkwin, and all its managed siblings, to
- *	be re-arranged at the next idle point.
+ *	Arranges for tkwin, and all its managed siblings, to be re-arranged at
+ *	the next idle point.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-PanedWindowReqProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Paned window's information about
-				 * window that got new preferred
-				 * geometry.  */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Other Tk-related information
-				 * about the window. */
+PanedWindowReqProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Paned window's information about window
+				 * that got new preferred geometry. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Other Tk-related information about the
+				 * window. */
 {
     Slave *slavePtr = (Slave *) clientData;
     PanedWindow *pwPtr = (PanedWindow *) (slavePtr->masterPtr);
@@ -1570,6 +1590,7 @@ PanedWindowReqProc(clientData, tkwin)
 	}
     } else {
 	int doubleBw = 2 * Tk_Changes(slavePtr->tkwin)->border_width;
+
 	if (slavePtr->width <= 0) {
 	    slavePtr->paneWidth = Tk_ReqWidth(slavePtr->tkwin) + doubleBw;
 	}
@@ -1585,27 +1606,28 @@ PanedWindowReqProc(clientData, tkwin)
  *
  * PanedWindowLostSlaveProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry
- *	claims control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
+ *	This function is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry claims
+ *	control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Forgets all information about the slave.  Causes geometry to
- *	be recomputed for the panedwindow.
+ *	Forgets all information about the slave. Causes geometry to be
+ *	recomputed for the panedwindow.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-PanedWindowLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Grid structure for slave window that
-				 * was stolen away. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk's handle for the slave window. */
+PanedWindowLostSlaveProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Grid structure for slave window that was
+				 * stolen away. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Tk's handle for the slave window. */
 {
     register Slave *slavePtr = (Slave *) clientData;
     PanedWindow *pwPtr = (PanedWindow *) (slavePtr->masterPtr);
+
     if (pwPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin)) {
 	Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin, pwPtr->tkwin);
     }
@@ -1623,11 +1645,10 @@ PanedWindowLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
  *
  * ArrangePanes --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked (using the Tcl_DoWhenIdle
- *	mechanism) to re-layout a set of windows managed by
- *	a paned window.  It is invoked at idle time so that a
- *	series of pane requests can be merged into a single
- *	layout operation.
+ *	This function is invoked (using the Tcl_DoWhenIdle mechanism) to
+ *	re-layout a set of windows managed by a paned window. It is invoked at
+ *	idle time so that a series of pane requests can be merged into a
+ *	single layout operation.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1639,8 +1660,8 @@ PanedWindowLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
  */
 
 static void
-ArrangePanes(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Structure describing parent whose slaves
+ArrangePanes(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Structure describing parent whose slaves
 				 * are to be re-layed out. */
 {
     register PanedWindow *pwPtr = (PanedWindow *) clientData;
@@ -1660,10 +1681,10 @@ ArrangePanes(clientData)
     pwPtr->flags &= ~(REQUESTED_RELAYOUT|RESIZE_PENDING);
 
     /*
-     * If the parent has no slaves anymore, then don't do anything
-     * at all:  just leave the parent's size as-is.  Otherwise there is
-     * no way to "relinquish" control over the parent so another geometry
-     * manager can take over.
+     * If the parent has no slaves anymore, then don't do anything at all:
+     * just leave the parent's size as-is. Otherwise there is no way to
+     * "relinquish" control over the parent so another geometry manager can
+     * take over.
      */
 
     if (pwPtr->numSlaves == 0) {
@@ -1697,8 +1718,8 @@ ArrangePanes(clientData)
     stretchReserve = (horizontal ? pwWidth : pwHeight);
 
     /*
-     * Calculate the sash width, including handle and padding,
-     * and the sash and handle offsets.
+     * Calculate the sash width, including handle and padding, and the sash
+     * and handle offsets.
      */
 
     sashOffset = handleOffset = pwPtr->sashPad;
@@ -1720,8 +1741,8 @@ ArrangePanes(clientData)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Compute the total size needed by all the slaves and the
-	 * left-over, or shortage of space available.
+	 * Compute the total size needed by all the slaves and the left-over,
+	 * or shortage of space available.
 	 */
 
 	if (horizontal) {
@@ -1756,15 +1777,14 @@ ArrangePanes(clientData)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Compute the size of this slave.  The algorithm (assuming a
+	 * Compute the size of this slave. The algorithm (assuming a
 	 * horizontal paned window) is:
 	 *
-	 * 1.  Get "base" dimensions.  If a width or height is specified
-	 *	for this slave, use those values; else use the
-	 *	ReqWidth/ReqHeight.
+	 * 1.  Get "base" dimensions. If a width or height is specified for
+	 *     this slave, use those values; else use the ReqWidth/ReqHeight.
 	 * 2.  Using base dimensions, pane dimensions, and sticky values,
-	 *	determine the x and y, and actual width and height of the
-	 *	widget.
+	 *     determine the x and y, and actual width and height of the
+	 *     widget.
 	 */
 
 	doubleBw = 2 * Tk_Changes(slavePtr->tkwin)->border_width;
@@ -1787,11 +1807,13 @@ ArrangePanes(clientData)
 	}
 	if (IsStretchable(slavePtr->stretch, i, first, last)) {
 	    double frac;
+
 	    if (paneDynSize > 0) {
 		frac = (double)paneSize / (double)paneDynSize;
 	    } else {
 		frac = (double)paneSize / (double)pwSize;
 	    }
+
 	    paneDynSize -= paneSize;
 	    paneDynMinSize -= slavePtr->minSize;
 	    stretchAmount = (int) (frac * stretchReserve);
@@ -1868,8 +1890,8 @@ ArrangePanes(clientData)
 	    if (x < internalBW) {
 		x = internalBW;
 	    }
-	    slavePtr->sashx   = x + sashOffset;
-	    slavePtr->sashy   = y;
+	    slavePtr->sashx = x + sashOffset;
+	    slavePtr->sashy = y;
 	    slavePtr->handlex = x + handleOffset;
 	    slavePtr->handley = y + pwPtr->handlePad;
 	    x += sashWidth;
@@ -1878,8 +1900,8 @@ ArrangePanes(clientData)
 	    if (y < internalBW) {
 		y = internalBW;
 	    }
-	    slavePtr->sashx   = x;
-	    slavePtr->sashy   = y + sashOffset;
+	    slavePtr->sashx = x;
+	    slavePtr->sashy = y + sashOffset;
 	    slavePtr->handlex = x + pwPtr->handlePad;
 	    slavePtr->handley = y + handleOffset;
 	    y += sashWidth;
@@ -1932,8 +1954,8 @@ ArrangePanes(clientData)
  */
 
 static void
-Unlink(slavePtr)
-    register Slave *slavePtr;		/* Window to unlink. */
+Unlink(
+    register Slave *slavePtr)		/* Window to unlink. */
 {
     register PanedWindow *masterPtr;
     int i, j;
@@ -1960,6 +1982,7 @@ Unlink(slavePtr)
     /*
      * Clean out any -after or -before references to this slave
      */
+
     for (i = 0; i < masterPtr->numSlaves; i++) {
 	if (masterPtr->slaves[i]->before == slavePtr->tkwin) {
 	    masterPtr->slaves[i]->before = None;
@@ -1976,9 +1999,10 @@ Unlink(slavePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Set the slave's masterPtr to NULL, so that we can tell that the
-     * slave is no longer attached to any panedwindow.
+     * Set the slave's masterPtr to NULL, so that we can tell that the slave
+     * is no longer attached to any panedwindow.
      */
+
     slavePtr->masterPtr = NULL;
 
     masterPtr->numSlaves--;
@@ -1989,12 +2013,12 @@ Unlink(slavePtr)
  *
  * GetPane --
  *
- *	Given a token to a Tk window, find the pane that corresponds to
- *	that token in a given paned window.
+ *	Given a token to a Tk window, find the pane that corresponds to that
+ *	token in a given paned window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Pointer to the slave structure, or NULL if the window is not
- *	managed by this paned window.
+ *	Pointer to the slave structure, or NULL if the window is not managed
+ *	by this paned window.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2003,11 +2027,12 @@ Unlink(slavePtr)
  */
 
 static Slave *
-GetPane(pwPtr, tkwin)
-    PanedWindow *pwPtr;		/* Pointer to the paned window info. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to search for. */
+GetPane(
+    PanedWindow *pwPtr,		/* Pointer to the paned window info. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window to search for. */
 {
     int i;
+
     for (i = 0; i < pwPtr->numSlaves; i++) {
 	if (pwPtr->slaves[i]->tkwin == tkwin) {
 	    return pwPtr->slaves[i];
@@ -2021,10 +2046,9 @@ GetPane(pwPtr, tkwin)
  *
  * SlaveStructureProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever StructureNotify events
- *	occur for a window that's managed by a paned window.  This
- *	procedure's only purpose is to clean up when windows are
- *	deleted.
+ *	This function is invoked whenever StructureNotify events occur for a
+ *	window that's managed by a paned window. This function's only purpose
+ *	is to clean up when windows are deleted.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2038,9 +2062,9 @@ GetPane(pwPtr, tkwin)
  */
 
 static void
-SlaveStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to record describing window item. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Describes what just happened. */
+SlaveStructureProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to record describing window item. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Describes what just happened. */
 {
     Slave *slavePtr = (Slave *) clientData;
     PanedWindow *pwPtr = slavePtr->masterPtr;
@@ -2058,8 +2082,8 @@ SlaveStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * ComputeGeometry --
  *
- *	Compute geometry for the paned window, including coordinates of
- *	all slave windows and each sash.
+ *	Compute geometry for the paned window, including coordinates of all
+ *	slave windows and each sash.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2071,8 +2095,8 @@ SlaveStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-ComputeGeometry(pwPtr)
-    PanedWindow *pwPtr;		/* Pointer to the Paned Window structure. */
+ComputeGeometry(
+    PanedWindow *pwPtr)		/* Pointer to the Paned Window structure. */
 {
     int i, x, y, doubleBw, internalBw;
     int sashWidth, sashOffset, handleOffset;
@@ -2086,10 +2110,10 @@ ComputeGeometry(pwPtr)
     reqWidth = reqHeight = 0;
 
     /*
-     * Sashes and handles share space on the display.  To simplify
-     * processing below, precompute the x and y offsets of the handles and
-     * sashes within the space occupied by their combination; later, just add
-     * those offsets blindly (avoiding the extra showHandle, etc, checks).
+     * Sashes and handles share space on the display. To simplify processing
+     * below, precompute the x and y offsets of the handles and sashes within
+     * the space occupied by their combination; later, just add those offsets
+     * blindly (avoiding the extra showHandle, etc, checks).
      */
 
     sashOffset = handleOffset = pwPtr->sashPad;
@@ -2119,9 +2143,9 @@ ComputeGeometry(pwPtr)
 	slavePtr->y = y;
 
 	/*
-	 * Make sure the pane's paned dimension is at least minsize.
-	 * This check may be redundant, since the only way to change a pane's
-	 * size is by moving a sash, and that code checks the minsize.
+	 * Make sure the pane's paned dimension is at least minsize. This
+	 * check may be redundant, since the only way to change a pane's size
+	 * is by moving a sash, and that code checks the minsize.
 	 */
 
 	if (horizontal) {
@@ -2141,15 +2165,15 @@ ComputeGeometry(pwPtr)
 
 	if (horizontal) {
 	    x += slavePtr->paneWidth + (2 * slavePtr->padx);
-	    slavePtr->sashx   = x + sashOffset;
-	    slavePtr->sashy   = y;
+	    slavePtr->sashx = x + sashOffset;
+	    slavePtr->sashy = y;
 	    slavePtr->handlex = x + handleOffset;
 	    slavePtr->handley = y + pwPtr->handlePad;
 	    x += sashWidth;
 	} else {
 	    y += slavePtr->paneHeight + (2 * slavePtr->pady);
-	    slavePtr->sashx   = x;
-	    slavePtr->sashy   = y + sashOffset;
+	    slavePtr->sashx = x;
+	    slavePtr->sashy = y + sashOffset;
 	    slavePtr->handlex = x + pwPtr->handlePad;
 	    slavePtr->handley = y + handleOffset;
 	    y += sashWidth;
@@ -2161,7 +2185,6 @@ ComputeGeometry(pwPtr)
 	 */
 
 	if (horizontal) {
-
 	    /*
 	     * If the slave has an explicit height set, use that; otherwise,
 	     * use the slave's requested height.
@@ -2178,10 +2201,9 @@ ComputeGeometry(pwPtr)
 		reqHeight = dim;
 	    }
 	} else {
-
 	    /*
-	     * If the slave has an explicit width set use that; otherwise,
-	     * use the slave's requested width.
+	     * If the slave has an explicit width set use that; otherwise, use
+	     * the slave's requested width.
 	     */
 
 	    if (slavePtr->width > 0) {
@@ -2198,21 +2220,21 @@ ComputeGeometry(pwPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The loop above should have left x (or y) equal to the sum of the
-     * widths (or heights) of the widgets, plus the size of one sash and
-     * the sash padding for each widget, plus the width of the left (or top)
-     * border of the paned window.
+     * The loop above should have left x (or y) equal to the sum of the widths
+     * (or heights) of the widgets, plus the size of one sash and the sash
+     * padding for each widget, plus the width of the left (or top) border of
+     * the paned window.
      *
      * The requested width (or height) is therefore x (or y) minus the size of
-     * one sash and padding, plus the width of the right (or bottom) border
-     * of the paned window.
+     * one sash and padding, plus the width of the right (or bottom) border of
+     * the paned window.
      *
-     * The height (or width) is equal to the maximum height (or width) of
-     * the slaves, plus the width of the border of the top and bottom (or left
-     * and right) of the paned window.
+     * The height (or width) is equal to the maximum height (or width) of the
+     * slaves, plus the width of the border of the top and bottom (or left and
+     * right) of the paned window.
      *
-     * If the panedwindow has an explicit width/height set use that; otherwise,
-     * use the requested width/height.
+     * If the panedwindow has an explicit width/height set use that;
+     * otherwise, use the requested width/height.
      */
 
     if (horizontal) {
@@ -2238,8 +2260,8 @@ ComputeGeometry(pwPtr)
  *
  * DestroyOptionTables --
  *
- *	This procedure is registered as an exit callback when the paned window
- *	command is first called.  It cleans up the OptionTables structure
+ *	This function is registered as an exit callback when the paned window
+ *	command is first called. It cleans up the OptionTables structure
  *	allocated by that command.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -2252,9 +2274,9 @@ ComputeGeometry(pwPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-DestroyOptionTables(clientData, interp)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to the OptionTables struct */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Pointer to the calling interp */
+DestroyOptionTables(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to the OptionTables struct */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* Pointer to the calling interp */
 {
     ckfree((char *)clientData);
     return;
@@ -2265,8 +2287,8 @@ DestroyOptionTables(clientData, interp)
  *
  * GetSticky -
  *
- *	Converts an internal boolean combination of "sticky" bits into a
- *	a Tcl string obj containing zero or mor of n, s, e, or w.
+ *	Converts an internal boolean combination of "sticky" bits into a Tcl
+ *	string obj containing zero or more of n, s, e, or w.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Tcl_Obj containing the string representation of the sticky value.
@@ -2278,11 +2300,11 @@ DestroyOptionTables(clientData, interp)
  */
 
 static Tcl_Obj *
-GetSticky(clientData, tkwin, recordPtr, internalOffset)
-    ClientData clientData;
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    char *recordPtr;		/* Pointer to widget record. */
-    int internalOffset;		/* Offset within *recordPtr containing the
+GetSticky(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    char *recordPtr,		/* Pointer to widget record. */
+    int internalOffset)		/* Offset within *recordPtr containing the
 				 * sticky value. */
 {
     int sticky = *(int *)(recordPtr + internalOffset);
@@ -2311,34 +2333,33 @@ GetSticky(clientData, tkwin, recordPtr, internalOffset)
  *
  * SetSticky --
  *
- *	Converts a Tcl_Obj representing a widgets stickyness into an
- *	integer value.
+ *	Converts a Tcl_Obj representing a widgets stickyness into an integer
+ *	value.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	May store the integer value into the internal representation
- *	pointer.  May change the pointer to the Tcl_Obj to NULL to indicate
- *	that the specified string was empty and that is acceptable.
+ *	May store the integer value into the internal representation pointer.
+ *	May change the pointer to the Tcl_Obj to NULL to indicate that the
+ *	specified string was empty and that is acceptable.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-SetSticky(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, recordPtr, internalOffset,
-	oldInternalPtr, flags)
-    ClientData clientData;
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interp; may be used for errors. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window for which option is being set. */
-    Tcl_Obj **value;		/* Pointer to the pointer to the value object.
-				 * We use a pointer to the pointer because
-				 * we may need to return a value (NULL). */
-    char *recordPtr;		/* Pointer to storage for the widget record. */
-    int internalOffset;		/* Offset within *recordPtr at which the
-				   internal value is to be stored. */
-    char *oldInternalPtr;	/* Pointer to storage for the old value. */
-    int flags;			/* Flags for the option, set Tk_SetOptions. */
+SetSticky(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interp; may be used for errors. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window for which option is being set. */
+    Tcl_Obj **value,		/* Pointer to the pointer to the value object.
+				 * We use a pointer to the pointer because we
+				 * may need to return a value (NULL). */
+    char *recordPtr,		/* Pointer to storage for the widget record. */
+    int internalOffset,		/* Offset within *recordPtr at which the
+				 * internal value is to be stored. */
+    char *oldInternalPtr,	/* Pointer to storage for the old value. */
+    int flags)			/* Flags for the option, set Tk_SetOptions. */
 {
     int sticky = 0;
     char c, *string, *internalPtr;
@@ -2374,8 +2395,7 @@ SetSticky(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, recordPtr, internalOffset,
 		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad stickyness value \"",
 			Tcl_GetString(*value), "\": must be a string ",
-			"containing zero or more of n, e, s, and w",
-			(char *)NULL);
+			"containing zero or more of n, e, s, and w", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	}
@@ -2405,11 +2425,11 @@ SetSticky(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, recordPtr, internalOffset,
  */
 
 static void
-RestoreSticky(clientData, tkwin, internalPtr, oldInternalPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    char *internalPtr;		/* Pointer to storage for value. */
-    char *oldInternalPtr;	/* Pointer to old value. */
+RestoreSticky(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    char *internalPtr,		/* Pointer to storage for value. */
+    char *oldInternalPtr)	/* Pointer to old value. */
 {
     *(int *)internalPtr = *(int *)oldInternalPtr;
 }
@@ -2419,14 +2439,13 @@ RestoreSticky(clientData, tkwin, internalPtr, oldInternalPtr)
  *
  * AdjustForSticky --
  *
- *	Given the x,y coords of the top-left corner of a pane, the
- *	dimensions of that pane, and the dimensions of a slave, compute
- *	the x,y coords and actual dimensions of the slave based on the slave's
- *	sticky value.
+ *	Given the x,y coords of the top-left corner of a pane, the dimensions
+ *	of that pane, and the dimensions of a slave, compute the x,y coords
+ *	and actual dimensions of the slave based on the slave's sticky value.
  *
  * Results:
- *	No direct return; sets the x, y, slaveWidth and slaveHeight to
- *	correct values.
+ *	No direct return; sets the x, y, slaveWidth and slaveHeight to correct
+ *	values.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2435,17 +2454,16 @@ RestoreSticky(clientData, tkwin, internalPtr, oldInternalPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-AdjustForSticky(sticky, cavityWidth, cavityHeight, xPtr, yPtr,
-	slaveWidthPtr, slaveHeightPtr)
-    int sticky;			/* Sticky value; see top of file for
+AdjustForSticky(
+    int sticky,			/* Sticky value; see top of file for
 				 * definition. */
-    int cavityWidth;		/* Width of the cavity. */
-    int cavityHeight;		/* Height of the cavity. */
-    int *xPtr, *yPtr;		/* Initially, coordinates of the top-left
+    int cavityWidth,		/* Width of the cavity. */
+    int cavityHeight,		/* Height of the cavity. */
+    int *xPtr, int *yPtr,	/* Initially, coordinates of the top-left
 				 * corner of cavity; also return values for
 				 * actual x, y coords of slave. */
-    int *slaveWidthPtr;		/* Slave width. */
-    int *slaveHeightPtr;	/* Slave height. */
+    int *slaveWidthPtr,		/* Slave width. */
+    int *slaveHeightPtr)	/* Slave height. */
 {
     int diffx = 0;		/* Cavity width - slave width. */
     int diffy = 0;		/* Cavity hight - slave height. */
@@ -2489,10 +2507,10 @@ AdjustForSticky(sticky, cavityWidth, cavityHeight, xPtr, yPtr,
  */
 
 static void
-MoveSash(pwPtr, sash, diff)
-    PanedWindow *pwPtr;
-    int sash;
-    int diff;
+MoveSash(
+    PanedWindow *pwPtr,
+    int sash,
+    int diff)
 {
     int i;
     int expandPane, reduceFirst, reduceLast, reduceIncr, slaveSize, sashOffset;
@@ -2529,12 +2547,12 @@ MoveSash(pwPtr, sash, diff)
     }
 
     /*
-     * There must be a next sash since it is only possible to enter
-     * this routine when moving an actual sash which implies there
-     * exists a visible pane to either side of the sash.
+     * There must be a next sash since it is only possible to enter this
+     * routine when moving an actual sash which implies there exists a visible
+     * pane to either side of the sash.
      */
 
-    while (nextSash < (pwPtr->numSlaves - 1) && pwPtr->slaves[nextSash]->hide) {
+    while (nextSash < pwPtr->numSlaves-1 && pwPtr->slaves[nextSash]->hide) {
 	nextSash++;
     }
 
@@ -2556,8 +2574,8 @@ MoveSash(pwPtr, sash, diff)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Calculate how much room we have to stretch in
-     * and adjust diff value accordingly.
+     * Calculate how much room we have to stretch in and adjust diff value
+     * accordingly.
      */
 
     for (i = reduceFirst; i != reduceLast; i += reduceIncr) {
@@ -2623,23 +2641,23 @@ MoveSash(pwPtr, sash, diff)
  *
  * ProxyWindowEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various
- *	events on paned window proxy windows.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various events on
+ *	paned window proxy windows.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up. Whena
+ *	it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ProxyWindowEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+ProxyWindowEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
     PanedWindow *pwPtr = (PanedWindow *) clientData;
 
@@ -2656,9 +2674,9 @@ ProxyWindowEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * DisplayProxyWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure redraws a paned window proxy window.
- *	It is invoked as a do-when-idle handler, so it only runs
- *	when there's nothing else for the application to do.
+ *	This function redraws a paned window proxy window. It is invoked as a
+ *	do-when-idle handler, so it only runs when there's nothing else for
+ *	the application to do.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2670,8 +2688,8 @@ ProxyWindowEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-DisplayProxyWindow(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
+DisplayProxyWindow(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about window. */
 {
     PanedWindow *pwPtr = (PanedWindow *) clientData;
     Pixmap pixmap;
@@ -2691,15 +2709,16 @@ DisplayProxyWindow(clientData)
     /*
      * Redraw the widget's background and border.
      */
+
     Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, pwPtr->background, 0, 0,
 	    Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), 2, pwPtr->sashRelief);
 
     /*
      * Copy the pixmap to the display.
      */
-    XCopyArea(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), pwPtr->gc,
-	    0, 0, (unsigned) Tk_Width(tkwin), (unsigned) Tk_Height(tkwin),
-	    0, 0);
+
+    XCopyArea(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), pwPtr->gc, 0, 0,
+	    (unsigned) Tk_Width(tkwin), (unsigned) Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, 0);
     Tk_FreePixmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap);
 }
 
@@ -2708,8 +2727,8 @@ DisplayProxyWindow(clientData)
  *
  * PanedWindowProxyCommand --
  *
- *	Handles the panedwindow proxy subcommand.  See the user
- *	documentation for details.
+ *	Handles the panedwindow proxy subcommand. See the user documentation
+ *	for details.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result.
@@ -2721,14 +2740,14 @@ DisplayProxyWindow(clientData)
  */
 
 static int
-PanedWindowProxyCommand(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
-    PanedWindow *pwPtr;		/* Pointer to paned window information. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+PanedWindowProxyCommand(
+    PanedWindow *pwPtr,		/* Pointer to paned window information. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
-	"coord", "forget", "place", (char *) NULL
+	"coord", "forget", "place", NULL
     };
     enum options {
 	PROXY_COORD, PROXY_FORGET, PROXY_PLACE
@@ -2809,21 +2828,22 @@ PanedWindowProxyCommand(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	pwPtr->proxyy = y;
 
 	/*
-	 * Make sure the proxy window is higher in the stacking order
-	 * than the slaves, so that it will be visible when drawn.
-	 * It would be more correct to push the proxy window just high
-	 * enough to appear above the highest slave, but it's much easier
-	 * to just force it all the way to the top of the stacking order.
+	 * Make sure the proxy window is higher in the stacking order than the
+	 * slaves, so that it will be visible when drawn. It would be more
+	 * correct to push the proxy window just high enough to appear above
+	 * the highest slave, but it's much easier to just force it all the
+	 * way to the top of the stacking order.
 	 */
 
 	Tk_RestackWindow(pwPtr->proxywin, Above, NULL);
 
 	/*
-	 * Let Tk_MaintainGeometry take care of placing the window at
-	 * the right coordinates.
+	 * Let Tk_MaintainGeometry take care of placing the window at the
+	 * right coordinates.
 	 */
-	Tk_MaintainGeometry(pwPtr->proxywin, pwPtr->tkwin,
-		x, y, sashWidth, sashHeight);
+
+	Tk_MaintainGeometry(pwPtr->proxywin, pwPtr->tkwin, x, y,
+		sashWidth, sashHeight);
 	break;
     }
 
@@ -2835,12 +2855,11 @@ PanedWindowProxyCommand(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * ObjectIsEmpty --
  *
- *	This procedure tests whether the string value of an object is
- *	empty.
+ *	This function tests whether the string value of an object is empty.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 1 if the string value of objPtr has length
- *	zero, and 0 otherwise.
+ *	The return value is 1 if the string value of objPtr has length zero,
+ *	and 0 otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	May cause object shimmering, since this function can force a
@@ -2850,8 +2869,8 @@ PanedWindowProxyCommand(pwPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-ObjectIsEmpty(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Object to test.  May be NULL. */
+ObjectIsEmpty(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* Object to test. May be NULL. */
 {
     int length;
 
@@ -2874,8 +2893,8 @@ ObjectIsEmpty(objPtr)
  *	within that record, compute the address of that slot.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If offset is non-negative, returns the computed address; else,
- *	returns NULL.
+ *	If offset is non-negative, returns the computed address; else, returns
+ *	NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2884,9 +2903,9 @@ ObjectIsEmpty(objPtr)
  */
 
 static char *
-ComputeSlotAddress(recordPtr, offset)
-    char *recordPtr;	/* Pointer to the start of a record. */
-    int offset;		/* Offset of a slot within that record; may be < 0. */
+ComputeSlotAddress(
+    char *recordPtr,	/* Pointer to the start of a record. */
+    int offset)		/* Offset of a slot within that record; may be < 0. */
 {
     if (offset >= 0) {
 	return recordPtr + offset;
@@ -2900,25 +2919,25 @@ ComputeSlotAddress(recordPtr, offset)
  *
  * PanedWindowIdentifyCoords --
  *
- *	Given a pair of x,y coordinates, identify the panedwindow component
- *	at that point, if any.
+ *	Given a pair of x,y coordinates, identify the panedwindow component at
+ *	that point, if any.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Modifies the interpreter's result to contain either an empty list,
- *	or a two element list of the form {sash n} or {handle n} to indicate
- *	that the point lies within the n'th sash or handle.
+ *	Modifies the interpreter's result to contain either an empty list, or
+ *	a two element list of the form {sash n} or {handle n} to indicate that
+ *	the point lies within the n'th sash or handle.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-PanedWindowIdentifyCoords(pwPtr, interp, x, y)
-    PanedWindow *pwPtr;		/* Information about the widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter in which to store result. */
-    int x, y;			/* Coordinates of the point to identify. */
+PanedWindowIdentifyCoords(
+    PanedWindow *pwPtr,		/* Information about the widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter in which to store result. */
+    int x, int y)		/* Coordinates of the point to identify. */
 {
     Tcl_Obj *list;
     int i, sashHeight, sashWidth, thisx, thisy;
@@ -2934,8 +2953,8 @@ PanedWindowIdentifyCoords(pwPtr, interp, x, y)
 	sashHeight -= 2 * Tk_InternalBorderWidth(pwPtr->tkwin);
 	if (pwPtr->showHandle && pwPtr->handleSize > pwPtr->sashWidth) {
 	    sashWidth = pwPtr->handleSize;
-	    lpad  = (pwPtr->handleSize - pwPtr->sashWidth) / 2;
-	    rpad  = pwPtr->handleSize - lpad;
+	    lpad = (pwPtr->handleSize - pwPtr->sashWidth) / 2;
+	    rpad = pwPtr->handleSize - lpad;
 	    lpad += pwPtr->sashPad;
 	    rpad += pwPtr->sashPad;
 	} else {
@@ -2946,8 +2965,8 @@ PanedWindowIdentifyCoords(pwPtr, interp, x, y)
     } else {
 	if (pwPtr->showHandle && pwPtr->handleSize > pwPtr->sashWidth) {
 	    sashHeight = pwPtr->handleSize;
-	    tpad  = (pwPtr->handleSize - pwPtr->sashWidth) / 2;
-	    bpad  = pwPtr->handleSize - tpad;
+	    tpad = (pwPtr->handleSize - pwPtr->sashWidth) / 2;
+	    bpad = pwPtr->handleSize - tpad;
 	    tpad += pwPtr->sashPad;
 	    bpad += pwPtr->sashPad;
 	} else {
@@ -2979,6 +2998,7 @@ PanedWindowIdentifyCoords(pwPtr, interp, x, y)
 	    /*
 	     * Determine if the point is over the handle or the sash.
 	     */
+
 	    if (pwPtr->showHandle) {
 		thisx = pwPtr->slaves[i]->handlex;
 		thisy = pwPtr->slaves[i]->handley;
@@ -2999,17 +3019,21 @@ PanedWindowIdentifyCoords(pwPtr, interp, x, y)
     /*
      * Set results.
      */
+
     if (found != -1) {
 	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, list, Tcl_NewIntObj(found));
-	if (isHandle) {
-	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, list,
-		    Tcl_NewStringObj("handle", -1));
-	} else {
-	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, list,
-		    Tcl_NewStringObj("sash", -1));
-	}
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, list, Tcl_NewStringObj(
+		(isHandle ? "handle" : "sash"), -1));
     }
 
     Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, list);
     return TCL_OK;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkPlace.c b/generic/tkPlace.c
index bdd0a7d..5024344 100644
--- a/generic/tkPlace.c
+++ b/generic/tkPlace.c
@@ -1,65 +1,64 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkPlace.c --
  *
- *	This file contains code to implement a simple geometry manager
- *	for Tk based on absolute placement or "rubber-sheet" placement.
+ *	This file contains code to implement a simple geometry manager for Tk
+ *	based on absolute placement or "rubber-sheet" placement.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkPlace.c,v 1.16 2004/09/16 18:01:20 pspjuth Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkPlace.c,v 1.17 2005/11/15 15:18:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
-
 /*
  * Border modes for relative placement:
  *
- * BM_INSIDE:		relative distances computed using area inside
- *			all borders of master window.
- * BM_OUTSIDE:		relative distances computed using outside area
- *			that includes all borders of master.
- * BM_IGNORE:		border issues are ignored:  place relative to
- *			master's actual window size.
+ * BM_INSIDE:		relative distances computed using area inside all
+ *			borders of master window.
+ * BM_OUTSIDE:		relative distances computed using outside area that
+ *			includes all borders of master.
+ * BM_IGNORE:		border issues are ignored: place relative to master's
+ *			actual window size.
  */
 
 static char *borderModeStrings[] = {
-    "inside", "outside", "ignore", (char *) NULL
+    "inside", "outside", "ignore", NULL
 };
 
 typedef enum {BM_INSIDE, BM_OUTSIDE, BM_IGNORE} BorderMode;
 
 /*
- * For each window whose geometry is managed by the placer there is
- * a structure of the following type:
+ * For each window whose geometry is managed by the placer there is a
+ * structure of the following type:
  */
 
 typedef struct Slave {
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk's token for window. */
     Tk_Window inTkwin;		/* Token for the -in window. */
-    struct Master *masterPtr;	/* Pointer to information for window
-				 * relative to which tkwin is placed.
-				 * This isn't necessarily the logical
-				 * parent of tkwin.  NULL means the
-				 * master was deleted or never assigned. */
-    struct Slave *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of windows placed relative
-				 * to same master (NULL for end of list). */
+    struct Master *masterPtr;	/* Pointer to information for window relative
+				 * to which tkwin is placed. This isn't
+				 * necessarily the logical parent of tkwin.
+				 * NULL means the master was deleted or never
+				 * assigned. */
+    struct Slave *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of windows placed relative to
+				 * same master (NULL for end of list). */
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Table that defines configuration options
 				 * available for this command. */
     /*
-     * Geometry information for window;  where there are both relative
-     * and absolute values for the same attribute (e.g. x and relX) only
-     * one of them is actually used, depending on flags.
+     * Geometry information for window; where there are both relative and
+     * absolute values for the same attribute (e.g. x and relX) only one of
+     * them is actually used, depending on flags.
      */
 
     int x, y;			/* X and Y pixel coordinates for tkwin. */
-    Tcl_Obj *xPtr, *yPtr;	/* Tcl_Obj rep's of x, y coords, to keep
-				 * pixel spec. information */
+    Tcl_Obj *xPtr, *yPtr;	/* Tcl_Obj rep's of x, y coords, to keep pixel
+				 * spec. information */
     double relX, relY;		/* X and Y coordinates relative to size of
 				 * master. */
     int width, height;		/* Absolute dimensions for tkwin. */
@@ -69,16 +68,17 @@ typedef struct Slave {
 				 * master. */
     Tcl_Obj *relWidthPtr;
     Tcl_Obj *relHeightPtr;
-    Tk_Anchor anchor;		/* Which point on tkwin is placed at the
-				 * given position. */
+    Tk_Anchor anchor;		/* Which point on tkwin is placed at the given
+				 * position. */
     BorderMode borderMode;	/* How to treat borders of master window. */
-    int flags;			/* Various flags;  see below for bit
+    int flags;			/* Various flags; see below for bit
 				 * definitions. */
 } Slave;
 
 /*
  * Type masks for options:
  */
+
 #define IN_MASK		1
 
 static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
@@ -106,10 +106,9 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
 	 Tk_Offset(Slave, x), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-y", NULL, NULL, "0", Tk_Offset(Slave, yPtr),
 	 Tk_Offset(Slave, y), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	 (char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
+    {TK_OPTION_END, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, 0, 0}
 };
-	
+
 /*
  * Flag definitions for Slave structures:
  *
@@ -125,35 +124,34 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
 #define CHILD_REL_HEIGHT	8
 
 /*
- * For each master window that has a slave managed by the placer there
- * is a structure of the following form:
+ * For each master window that has a slave managed by the placer there is a
+ * structure of the following form:
  */
 
 typedef struct Master {
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk's token for master window. */
-    struct Slave *slavePtr;	/* First in linked list of slaves
-				 * placed relative to this master. */
+    struct Slave *slavePtr;	/* First in linked list of slaves placed
+				 * relative to this master. */
     int flags;			/* See below for bit definitions. */
 } Master;
 
 /*
  * Flag definitions for masters:
  *
- * PARENT_RECONFIG_PENDING -	1 means that a call to RecomputePlacement
- *				is already pending via a Do_When_Idle handler.
+ * PARENT_RECONFIG_PENDING -	1 means that a call to RecomputePlacement is
+ *				already pending via a Do_When_Idle handler.
  */
 
 #define PARENT_RECONFIG_PENDING	1
 
 /*
- * The following structure is the official type record for the
- * placer:
+ * The following structure is the official type record for the placer:
  */
 
-static void		PlaceRequestProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void		PlaceLostSlaveProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
+static void		PlaceRequestProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		PlaceLostSlaveProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin);
 
 static Tk_GeomMgr placerType = {
     "place",				/* name */
@@ -162,35 +160,32 @@ static Tk_GeomMgr placerType = {
 };
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static void		SlaveStructureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static int		ConfigureSlave _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_OptionTable table,
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		PlaceInfoCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
-static Slave *		CreateSlave _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    Tk_OptionTable table));
-static void             FreeSlave _ANSI_ARGS_((Slave *slavePtr));
-static Slave *		FindSlave _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
-static Master *		CreateMaster _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
-static Master *		FindMaster _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void		MasterStructureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void		RecomputePlacement _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void		UnlinkSlave _ANSI_ARGS_((Slave *slavePtr));
+static void		SlaveStructureProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static int		ConfigureSlave(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tk_OptionTable table, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		PlaceInfoCommand(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin);
+static Slave *		CreateSlave(Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_OptionTable table);
+static void             FreeSlave(Slave *slavePtr);
+static Slave *		FindSlave(Tk_Window tkwin);
+static Master *		CreateMaster(Tk_Window tkwin);
+static Master *		FindMaster(Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		MasterStructureProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		RecomputePlacement(ClientData clientData);
+static void		UnlinkSlave(Slave *slavePtr);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_PlaceObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "place" Tcl
- *	commands.  See the user documentation for details on
- *	what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "place" Tcl commands. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -202,11 +197,11 @@ static void		UnlinkSlave _ANSI_ARGS_((Slave *slavePtr));
  */
 
 int
-Tk_PlaceObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* NULL. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_PlaceObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* NULL. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin;
     Slave *slavePtr;
@@ -214,20 +209,19 @@ Tk_PlaceObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     TkDisplay *dispPtr;
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
     static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
-	"configure", "forget", "info", "slaves", (char *) NULL
+	"configure", "forget", "info", "slaves", NULL
     };
     enum options { PLACE_CONFIGURE, PLACE_FORGET, PLACE_INFO, PLACE_SLAVES };
     int index;
-    
-    
+
     if (objc < 3) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option|pathName args");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the option table for this widget class.  If it has already
-     * been created, the cached pointer will be returned.
+     * Create the option table for this widget class. If it has already been
+     * created, the cached pointer will be returned.
      */
 
      optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs);
@@ -258,8 +252,8 @@ Tk_PlaceObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Handle more general case of option followed by window name followed
-     * by possible additional arguments.
+     * Handle more general case of option followed by window name followed by
+     * possible additional arguments.
      */
 
     tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
@@ -285,81 +279,74 @@ Tk_PlaceObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-	case PLACE_CONFIGURE: {
+    case PLACE_CONFIGURE:
+	if (objc == 3 || objc == 4) {
 	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
-	    if (objc == 3 || objc == 4) {
-		slavePtr = FindSlave(tkwin);
-		if (slavePtr == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_OK;
-		}
-		objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) slavePtr,
-			optionTable,
-			(objc == 4) ? objv[3] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL, tkwin);
-		if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-		    return TCL_OK;
-		}
-	    } else {
-		return ConfigureSlave(interp, tkwin, optionTable, objc-3,
-			objv+3);
-	    }
-	}
-	
-	case PLACE_FORGET: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pathName");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
+
 	    slavePtr = FindSlave(tkwin);
 	    if (slavePtr == NULL) {
 		return TCL_OK;
 	    }
-	    if ((slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL) &&
-		    (slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin !=
-			    Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin))) {
-		Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin,
-			slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin);
-	    }
-	    UnlinkSlave(slavePtr);
-	    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->slaveTable,
-		    (char *) tkwin));
-	    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
-		    SlaveStructureProc,	(ClientData) slavePtr);
-	    Tk_ManageGeometry(tkwin, (Tk_GeomMgr *) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
-	    Tk_UnmapWindow(tkwin);
-	    FreeSlave(slavePtr);
-	    break;
-	}
-	
-	case PLACE_INFO: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pathName");
+	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) slavePtr, optionTable,
+		    (objc == 4) ? objv[3] : NULL, tkwin);
+	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    return PlaceInfoCommand(interp, tkwin);
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
+	return ConfigureSlave(interp, tkwin, optionTable, objc-3, objv+3);
 
-	case PLACE_SLAVES: {
-	    Master *masterPtr;
-	    Tcl_Obj *listPtr;
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pathName");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    masterPtr = FindMaster(tkwin);
-	    if (masterPtr != NULL) {
-		listPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
-		for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
-		     slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
-		    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listPtr,
-			    Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(slavePtr->tkwin),-1));
-		}
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listPtr);
+    case PLACE_FORGET:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pathName");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	slavePtr = FindSlave(tkwin);
+	if (slavePtr == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if ((slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL) &&
+		(slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin))) {
+	    Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin, slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin);
+	}
+	UnlinkSlave(slavePtr);
+	Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->slaveTable,
+		(char *) tkwin));
+	Tk_DeleteEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask, SlaveStructureProc,
+		(ClientData) slavePtr);
+	Tk_ManageGeometry(tkwin, NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+	Tk_UnmapWindow(tkwin);
+	FreeSlave(slavePtr);
+	break;
+
+    case PLACE_INFO:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pathName");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	return PlaceInfoCommand(interp, tkwin);
+
+    case PLACE_SLAVES: {
+	Master *masterPtr;
+
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pathName");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	masterPtr = FindMaster(tkwin);
+	if (masterPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_Obj *listPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
+
+	    for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
+		    slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
+		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listPtr,
+			Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(slavePtr->tkwin),-1));
 	    }
-	    break;
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listPtr);
 	}
+	break;
+    }
     }
 
     return TCL_OK;
@@ -370,8 +357,8 @@ Tk_PlaceObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * CreateSlave --
  *
- *	Given a Tk_Window token, find the Slave structure corresponding
- *	to that token, creating a new one if necessary.
+ *	Given a Tk_Window token, find the Slave structure corresponding to
+ *	that token, creating a new one if necessary.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Pointer to the Slave structure.
@@ -383,24 +370,24 @@ Tk_PlaceObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static Slave *
-CreateSlave(tkwin, table)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for desired slave. */
-    Tk_OptionTable table;
+CreateSlave(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for desired slave. */
+    Tk_OptionTable table)
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     register Slave *slavePtr;
     int new;
-    TkDisplay * dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
 
     hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->slaveTable, (char *) tkwin, &new);
     if (new) {
 	slavePtr = (Slave *) ckalloc(sizeof(Slave));
 	memset(slavePtr, 0, sizeof(Slave));
-	slavePtr->tkwin		= tkwin;
-	slavePtr->inTkwin	= None;
-	slavePtr->anchor	= TK_ANCHOR_NW;
-	slavePtr->borderMode	= BM_INSIDE;
-	slavePtr->optionTable   = table;
+	slavePtr->tkwin = tkwin;
+	slavePtr->inTkwin = None;
+	slavePtr->anchor = TK_ANCHOR_NW;
+	slavePtr->borderMode = BM_INSIDE;
+	slavePtr->optionTable = table;
 	Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, slavePtr);
 	Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask, SlaveStructureProc,
 		(ClientData) slavePtr);
@@ -409,7 +396,6 @@ CreateSlave(tkwin, table)
     }
     return slavePtr;
 }
-
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -428,22 +414,22 @@ CreateSlave(tkwin, table)
  */
 
 static void
-FreeSlave(Slave *slavePtr)
+FreeSlave(
+    Slave *slavePtr)
 {
     Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) slavePtr, slavePtr->optionTable,
 	    slavePtr->tkwin);
     ckfree((char *) slavePtr);
 }
-
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * FindSlave --
  *
- *	Given a Tk_Window token, find the Slave structure corresponding
- *	to that token.  This is purely a lookup function; it will not
- *	create a record if one does not yet exist.
+ *	Given a Tk_Window token, find the Slave structure corresponding to
+ *	that token. This is purely a lookup function; it will not create a
+ *	record if one does not yet exist.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Pointer to Slave structure; NULL if none exists.
@@ -455,8 +441,8 @@ FreeSlave(Slave *slavePtr)
  */
 
 static Slave *
-FindSlave(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for desired slave. */
+FindSlave(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Token for desired slave. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     register Slave *slavePtr;
@@ -475,8 +461,8 @@ FindSlave(tkwin)
  *
  * UnlinkSlave --
  *
- *	This procedure removes a slave window from the chain of slaves
- *	in its master.
+ *	This function removes a slave window from the chain of slaves in its
+ *	master.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -488,8 +474,8 @@ FindSlave(tkwin)
  */
 
 static void
-UnlinkSlave(slavePtr)
-    Slave *slavePtr;		/* Slave structure to be unlinked. */
+UnlinkSlave(
+    Slave *slavePtr)		/* Slave structure to be unlinked. */
 {
     register Master *masterPtr;
     register Slave *prevPtr;
@@ -501,8 +487,7 @@ UnlinkSlave(slavePtr)
     if (masterPtr->slavePtr == slavePtr) {
 	masterPtr->slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr;
     } else {
-	for (prevPtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; ;
-		prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr) {
+	for (prevPtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; ; prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if (prevPtr == NULL) {
 		Tcl_Panic("UnlinkSlave couldn't find slave to unlink");
 	    }
@@ -520,8 +505,8 @@ UnlinkSlave(slavePtr)
  *
  * CreateMaster --
  *
- *	Given a Tk_Window token, find the Master structure corresponding
- *	to that token, creating a new one if necessary.
+ *	Given a Tk_Window token, find the Master structure corresponding to
+ *	that token, creating a new one if necessary.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Pointer to the Master structure.
@@ -533,8 +518,8 @@ UnlinkSlave(slavePtr)
  */
 
 static Master *
-CreateMaster(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for desired master. */
+CreateMaster(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Token for desired master. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     register Master *masterPtr;
@@ -544,9 +529,9 @@ CreateMaster(tkwin)
     hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->masterTable, (char *) tkwin, &new);
     if (new) {
 	masterPtr = (Master *) ckalloc(sizeof(Master));
-	masterPtr->tkwin	= tkwin;
-	masterPtr->slavePtr	= NULL;
-	masterPtr->flags	= 0;
+	masterPtr->tkwin = tkwin;
+	masterPtr->slavePtr = NULL;
+	masterPtr->flags = 0;
 	Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, masterPtr);
 	Tk_CreateEventHandler(masterPtr->tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
 		MasterStructureProc, (ClientData) masterPtr);
@@ -561,13 +546,13 @@ CreateMaster(tkwin)
  *
  * FindMaster --
  *
- *	Given a Tk_Window token, find the Master structure corresponding
- *	to that token.  This is simply a lookup procedure; a new record
- *	will not be created if one does not already exist.
+ *	Given a Tk_Window token, find the Master structure corresponding to
+ *	that token. This is simply a lookup function; a new record will not be
+ *	created if one does not already exist.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Pointer to the Master structure; NULL if one does not exist for
- *	the given Tk_Window token.
+ *	Pointer to the Master structure; NULL if one does not exist for the
+ *	given Tk_Window token.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -576,8 +561,8 @@ CreateMaster(tkwin)
  */
 
 static Master *
-FindMaster(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for desired master. */
+FindMaster(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Token for desired master. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     register Master *masterPtr;
@@ -596,27 +581,27 @@ FindMaster(tkwin)
  *
  * ConfigureSlave --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an argv/argc list to
- *	reconfigure the placement of a window.
+ *	This function is called to process an argv/argc list to reconfigure
+ *	the placement of a window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result.  If an error occurs then a message is
- *	left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result. If an error occurs then a message is left in
+ *	the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Information in slavePtr may change, and slavePtr's master is
- *	scheduled for reconfiguration.
+ *	Information in slavePtr may change, and slavePtr's master is scheduled
+ *	for reconfiguration.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ConfigureSlave(interp, tkwin, table, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for the window to manipulate. */
-    Tk_OptionTable table;	/* Token for option table. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of config arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Object values for arguments. */
+ConfigureSlave(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for the window to manipulate. */
+    Tk_OptionTable table,	/* Token for option table. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of config arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Object values for arguments. */
 {
     register Master *masterPtr;
     Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
@@ -626,8 +611,7 @@ ConfigureSlave(interp, tkwin, table, objc, objv)
 
     if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(tkwin)) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't use placer on top-level window \"",
-		Tk_PathName(tkwin), "\"; use wm command instead",
-		(char *) NULL);
+		Tk_PathName(tkwin), "\"; use wm command instead", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
@@ -639,7 +623,7 @@ ConfigureSlave(interp, tkwin, table, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Set slave flags.  First clear the field, then add bits as needed.
+     * Set slave flags. First clear the field, then add bits as needed.
      */
 
     slavePtr->flags = 0;
@@ -661,8 +645,8 @@ ConfigureSlave(interp, tkwin, table, objc, objv)
 
     if (((mask & IN_MASK) == 0) && (slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL)) {
 	/*
-	 * If no -in option was passed and the slave is already placed
-	 * then just recompute the placement.
+	 * If no -in option was passed and the slave is already placed then
+	 * just recompute the placement.
 	 */
 
 	masterPtr = slavePtr->masterPtr;
@@ -675,9 +659,9 @@ ConfigureSlave(interp, tkwin, table, objc, objv)
 	tkwin = slavePtr->inTkwin;
 
 	/*
-	 * Make sure that the new master is either the logical parent
-	 * of the slave or a descendant of that window, and that the
-	 * master and slave aren't the same.
+	 * Make sure that the new master is either the logical parent of the
+	 * slave or a descendant of that window, and that the master and slave
+	 * aren't the same.
 	 */
 
 	for (ancestor = tkwin; ; ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) {
@@ -687,33 +671,31 @@ ConfigureSlave(interp, tkwin, table, objc, objv)
 	    if (Tk_TopWinHierarchy(ancestor)) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't place ",
 			Tk_PathName(slavePtr->tkwin), " relative to ",
-			Tk_PathName(tkwin), (char *) NULL);
+			Tk_PathName(tkwin), NULL);
 		goto error;
 	    }
 	}
 	if (slavePtr->tkwin == tkwin) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't place ",
 		    Tk_PathName(slavePtr->tkwin), " relative to itself",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+		    NULL);
 	    goto error;
 	}
 	if ((slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL)
 		&& (slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin == tkwin)) {
 	    /*
-	     * Re-using same old master.  Nothing to do.
+	     * Re-using same old master. Nothing to do.
 	     */
+
 	    masterPtr = slavePtr->masterPtr;
 	    goto scheduleLayout;
-	} else {
-	    if ((slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL)
-		    && (slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin
-			    != Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin))) {
-		Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin,
-			slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin);
-	    }
-	    UnlinkSlave(slavePtr);
-	    masterWin = tkwin;
 	}
+	if ((slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL) &&
+		(slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin))) {
+	    Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin, slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin);
+	}
+	UnlinkSlave(slavePtr);
+	masterWin = tkwin;
     }
 
     /*
@@ -736,11 +718,10 @@ ConfigureSlave(interp, tkwin, table, objc, objv)
     Tk_ManageGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin, &placerType, (ClientData) slavePtr);
 
     /*
-     * Arrange for the master to be re-arranged at the first
-     * idle moment.
+     * Arrange for the master to be re-arranged at the first idle moment.
      */
 
-    scheduleLayout:
+  scheduleLayout:
     Tk_FreeSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
 
     if (!(masterPtr->flags & PARENT_RECONFIG_PENDING)) {
@@ -753,7 +734,7 @@ ConfigureSlave(interp, tkwin, table, objc, objv)
      * Error while processing some option, cleanup and return.
      */
 
-    error:
+  error:
     Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -763,27 +744,27 @@ ConfigureSlave(interp, tkwin, table, objc, objv)
  *
  * PlaceInfoCommand --
  *
- *	Implementation of the [place info] subcommand.  See the user
+ *	Implementation of the [place info] subcommand. See the user
  *	documentation for information on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the given tkwin is managed by the placer, this function will
- *	put information about that placement in the interp's result.
+ *	If the given tkwin is managed by the placer, this function will put
+ *	information about that placement in the interp's result.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-PlaceInfoCommand(interp, tkwin)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp into which to place result. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for the window to get info on. */
+PlaceInfoCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp into which to place result. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Token for the window to get info on. */
 {
     char buffer[32 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
     Slave *slavePtr;
-    
+
     slavePtr = FindSlave(tkwin);
     if (slavePtr == NULL) {
 	return TCL_OK;
@@ -793,38 +774,38 @@ PlaceInfoCommand(interp, tkwin)
 	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tk_PathName(slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin));
     }
     sprintf(buffer, " -x %d", slavePtr->x);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     sprintf(buffer, " -relx %.4g", slavePtr->relX);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     sprintf(buffer, " -y %d", slavePtr->y);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     sprintf(buffer, " -rely %.4g", slavePtr->relY);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     if (slavePtr->flags & CHILD_WIDTH) {
 	sprintf(buffer, " -width %d", slavePtr->width);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -width {}", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -width {}", NULL);
     }
     if (slavePtr->flags & CHILD_REL_WIDTH) {
 	sprintf(buffer, " -relwidth %.4g", slavePtr->relWidth);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -relwidth {}", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -relwidth {}", NULL);
     }
     if (slavePtr->flags & CHILD_HEIGHT) {
 	sprintf(buffer, " -height %d", slavePtr->height);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -height {}", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -height {}", NULL);
     }
     if (slavePtr->flags & CHILD_REL_HEIGHT) {
 	sprintf(buffer, " -relheight %.4g", slavePtr->relHeight);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL);
     } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -relheight {}", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -relheight {}", NULL);
     }
-    
+
     Tcl_AppendElement(interp, "-anchor");
     Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tk_NameOfAnchor(slavePtr->anchor));
     Tcl_AppendElement(interp, "-bordermode");
@@ -837,8 +818,8 @@ PlaceInfoCommand(interp, tkwin)
  *
  * RecomputePlacement --
  *
- *	This procedure is called as a when-idle handler.  It recomputes
- *	the geometries of all the slaves of a given master.
+ *	This function is called as a when-idle handler. It recomputes the
+ *	geometries of all the slaves of a given master.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -850,8 +831,8 @@ PlaceInfoCommand(interp, tkwin)
  */
 
 static void
-RecomputePlacement(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to Master record. */
+RecomputePlacement(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to Master record. */
 {
     register Master *masterPtr = (Master *) clientData;
     register Slave *slavePtr;
@@ -862,15 +843,15 @@ RecomputePlacement(clientData)
     masterPtr->flags &= ~PARENT_RECONFIG_PENDING;
 
     /*
-     * Iterate over all the slaves for the master.  Each slave's
-     * geometry can be computed independently of the other slaves.
+     * Iterate over all the slaves for the master. Each slave's geometry can
+     * be computed independently of the other slaves.
      */
 
     for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
 	    slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
 	/*
-	 * Step 1: compute size and borderwidth of master, taking into
-	 * account desired border mode.
+	 * Step 1: compute size and borderwidth of master, taking into account
+	 * desired border mode.
 	 */
 
 	masterX = masterY = 0;
@@ -889,8 +870,8 @@ RecomputePlacement(clientData)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Step 2:  compute size of slave (outside dimensions including
-	 * border) and location of anchor point within master.
+	 * Step 2: compute size of slave (outside dimensions including border)
+	 * and location of anchor point within master.
 	 */
 
 	x1 = slavePtr->x + masterX + (slavePtr->relX*masterWidth);
@@ -904,11 +885,11 @@ RecomputePlacement(clientData)
 	    }
 	    if (slavePtr->flags & CHILD_REL_WIDTH) {
 		/*
-		 * The code below is a bit tricky.  In order to round
-		 * correctly when both relX and relWidth are specified,
-		 * compute the location of the right edge and round that,
-		 * then compute width.  If we compute the width and round
-		 * it, rounding errors in relX and relWidth accumulate.
+		 * The code below is a bit tricky. In order to round correctly
+		 * when both relX and relWidth are specified, compute the
+		 * location of the right edge and round that, then compute
+		 * width. If we compute the width and round it, rounding
+		 * errors in relX and relWidth accumulate.
 		 */
 
 		x2 = x1 + (slavePtr->relWidth*masterWidth);
@@ -925,7 +906,7 @@ RecomputePlacement(clientData)
 		height += slavePtr->height;
 	    }
 	    if (slavePtr->flags & CHILD_REL_HEIGHT) {
-		/* 
+		/*
 		 * See note above for rounding errors in width computation.
 		 */
 
@@ -939,47 +920,47 @@ RecomputePlacement(clientData)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Step 3: adjust the x and y positions so that the desired
-	 * anchor point on the slave appears at that position.  Also
-	 * adjust for the border mode and master's border.
+	 * Step 3: adjust the x and y positions so that the desired anchor
+	 * point on the slave appears at that position. Also adjust for the
+	 * border mode and master's border.
 	 */
 
 	switch (slavePtr->anchor) {
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_N:
-		x -= width/2;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
-		x -= width;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_E:
-		x -= width;
-		y -= height/2;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
-		x -= width;
-		y -= height;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_S:
-		x -= width/2;
-		y -= height;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
-		y -= height;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_W:
-		y -= height/2;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
-		x -= width/2;
-		y -= height/2;
-		break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_N:
+	    x -= width/2;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
+	    x -= width;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_E:
+	    x -= width;
+	    y -= height/2;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
+	    x -= width;
+	    y -= height;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_S:
+	    x -= width/2;
+	    y -= height;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
+	    y -= height;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_W:
+	    y -= height/2;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
+	    x -= width/2;
+	    y -= height/2;
+	    break;
 	}
 
 	/*
 	 * Step 4: adjust width and height again to reflect inside dimensions
-	 * of window rather than outside.  Also make sure that the width and
+	 * of window rather than outside. Also make sure that the width and
 	 * height aren't zero.
 	 */
 
@@ -993,11 +974,10 @@ RecomputePlacement(clientData)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Step 5: reconfigure the window and map it if needed.  If the
-	 * slave is a child of the master, we do this ourselves.  If the
-	 * slave isn't a child of the master, let Tk_MaintainGeometry do
-	 * the work (it will re-adjust things as relevant windows map,
-	 * unmap, and move).
+	 * Step 5: reconfigure the window and map it if needed. If the slave
+	 * is a child of the master, we do this ourselves. If the slave isn't
+	 * a child of the master, let Tk_MaintainGeometry do the work (it will
+	 * re-adjust things as relevant windows map, unmap, and move).
 	 */
 
 	if (masterPtr->tkwin == Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin)) {
@@ -1009,8 +989,8 @@ RecomputePlacement(clientData)
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * Don't map the slave unless the master is mapped: the slave
-	     * will get mapped later, when the master is mapped.
+	     * Don't map the slave unless the master is mapped: the slave will
+	     * get mapped later, when the master is mapped.
 	     */
 
 	    if (Tk_IsMapped(masterPtr->tkwin)) {
@@ -1033,24 +1013,24 @@ RecomputePlacement(clientData)
  *
  * MasterStructureProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event handler when
- *	StructureNotify events occur for a master window.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk event handler when StructureNotify
+ *	events occur for a master window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Structures get cleaned up if the window was deleted.  If the
- *	window was resized then slave geometries get recomputed.
+ *	Structures get cleaned up if the window was deleted. If the window was
+ *	resized then slave geometries get recomputed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-MasterStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to Master structure for window
+MasterStructureProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to Master structure for window
 				 * referred to by eventPtr. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Describes what just happened. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Describes what just happened. */
 {
     register Master *masterPtr = (Master *) clientData;
     register Slave *slavePtr, *nextPtr;
@@ -1078,8 +1058,8 @@ MasterStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	ckfree((char *) masterPtr);
     } else if (eventPtr->type == MapNotify) {
 	/*
-	 * When a master gets mapped, must redo the geometry computation
-	 * so that all of its slaves get remapped.
+	 * When a master gets mapped, must redo the geometry computation so
+	 * that all of its slaves get remapped.
 	 */
 
 	if ((masterPtr->slavePtr != NULL)
@@ -1089,8 +1069,8 @@ MasterStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	}
     } else if (eventPtr->type == UnmapNotify) {
 	/*
-	 * Unmap all of the slaves when the master gets unmapped,
-	 * so that they don't keep redisplaying themselves.
+	 * Unmap all of the slaves when the master gets unmapped, so that they
+	 * don't keep redisplaying themselves.
 	 */
 
 	for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
@@ -1105,8 +1085,8 @@ MasterStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * SlaveStructureProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event handler when
- *	StructureNotify events occur for a slave window.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk event handler when StructureNotify
+ *	events occur for a slave window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1118,10 +1098,10 @@ MasterStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-SlaveStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to Slave structure for window
+SlaveStructureProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to Slave structure for window
 				 * referred to by eventPtr. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Describes what just happened. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Describes what just happened. */
 {
     register Slave *slavePtr = (Slave *) clientData;
     TkDisplay * dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) slavePtr->tkwin)->dispPtr;
@@ -1141,25 +1121,24 @@ SlaveStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * PlaceRequestProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk whenever a slave managed by us
- *	changes its requested geometry.
+ *	This function is invoked by Tk whenever a slave managed by us changes
+ *	its requested geometry.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The window will get relayed out, if its requested size has
- *	anything to do with its actual size.
+ *	The window will get relayed out, if its requested size has anything to
+ *	do with its actual size.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static void
-PlaceRequestProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to our record for slave. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window that changed its desired
-					 * size. */
+PlaceRequestProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to our record for slave. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window that changed its desired size. */
 {
     Slave *slavePtr = (Slave *) clientData;
     Master *masterPtr;
@@ -1183,8 +1162,8 @@ PlaceRequestProc(clientData, tkwin)
  *
  * PlaceLostSlaveProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry
- *	claims control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
+ *	This function is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry claims
+ *	control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1197,10 +1176,10 @@ PlaceRequestProc(clientData, tkwin)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static void
-PlaceLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Slave structure for slave window that
-				 * was stolen away. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk's handle for the slave window. */
+PlaceLostSlaveProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Slave structure for slave window that was
+				 * stolen away. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Tk's handle for the slave window. */
 {
     register Slave *slavePtr = (Slave *) clientData;
     TkDisplay * dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) slavePtr->tkwin)->dispPtr;
@@ -1210,9 +1189,17 @@ PlaceLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
     }
     Tk_UnmapWindow(tkwin);
     UnlinkSlave(slavePtr);
-    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->slaveTable, 
+    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->slaveTable,
             (char *) tkwin));
     Tk_DeleteEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask, SlaveStructureProc,
 	    (ClientData) slavePtr);
     FreeSlave(slavePtr);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkPointer.c b/generic/tkPointer.c
index 917020f..3b38cbe 100644
--- a/generic/tkPointer.c
+++ b/generic/tkPointer.c
@@ -1,17 +1,17 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkPointer.c --
  *
- *	This file contains functions for emulating the X server
- *	pointer and grab state machine.  This file is used by the
- *	Mac and Windows platforms to generate appropriate enter/leave
- *	events, and to update the global grab window information.
+ *	This file contains functions for emulating the X server pointer and
+ *	grab state machine. This file is used by the Mac and Windows platforms
+ *	to generate appropriate enter/leave events, and to update the global
+ *	grab window information.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkPointer.c,v 1.9 2004/03/17 18:15:43 das Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkPointer.c,v 1.10 2005/11/15 15:18:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
@@ -26,8 +26,8 @@
 #endif
 
 /*
- * Mask that selects any of the state bits corresponding to buttons,
- * plus masks that select individual buttons' bits:
+ * Mask that selects any of the state bits corresponding to buttons, plus
+ * masks that select individual buttons' bits:
  */
 
 #define ALL_BUTTONS \
@@ -38,15 +38,15 @@ static unsigned int buttonMasks[] = {
 #define ButtonMask(b) (buttonMasks[(b)-Button1])
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
-    TkWindow *grabWinPtr;	        /* Window that defines the top of the
-					 * grab tree in a global grab. */
-    int lastState;		        /* Last known state flags. */
-    XPoint lastPos;	                /* Last reported mouse position. */
-    TkWindow *lastWinPtr;	        /* Last reported mouse window. */
-    TkWindow *restrictWinPtr;    	/* Window to which all mouse events
-					 * will be reported. */
-    TkWindow *cursorWinPtr;	        /* Window that is currently
-					 * controlling the global cursor. */
+    TkWindow *grabWinPtr;	/* Window that defines the top of the grab
+				 * tree in a global grab. */
+    int lastState;		/* Last known state flags. */
+    XPoint lastPos;		/* Last reported mouse position. */
+    TkWindow *lastWinPtr;	/* Last reported mouse window. */
+    TkWindow *restrictWinPtr;	/* Window to which all mouse events will be
+				 * reported. */
+    TkWindow *cursorWinPtr;	/* Window that is currently controlling the
+				 * global cursor. */
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
@@ -54,12 +54,11 @@ static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
  * Forward declarations of procedures used in this file.
  */
 
-static int		GenerateEnterLeave _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-			    int x, int y, int state));
-static void		InitializeEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((XEvent* eventPtr,
-			    TkWindow *winPtr, int type, int x, int y,
-			    int state, int detail));
-static void		UpdateCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+static int		GenerateEnterLeave(TkWindow *winPtr, int x, int y,
+			    int state);
+static void		InitializeEvent(XEvent* eventPtr, TkWindow *winPtr,
+			    int type, int x, int y, int state, int detail);
+static void		UpdateCursor(TkWindow *winPtr);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -78,13 +77,13 @@ static void		UpdateCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
  */
 
 static void
-InitializeEvent(eventPtr, winPtr, type, x, y, state, detail)
-    XEvent* eventPtr;		/* Event structure to initialize. */
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window to make event relative to. */
-    int type;			/* Message type. */
-    int x, y;			/* Root coords of event. */
-    int state;			/* State flags. */
-    int detail;			/* Detail value. */
+InitializeEvent(
+    XEvent *eventPtr,		/* Event structure to initialize. */
+    TkWindow *winPtr,		/* Window to make event relative to. */
+    int type,			/* Message type. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Root coords of event. */
+    int state,			/* State flags. */
+    int detail)			/* Detail value. */
 {
     eventPtr->type = type;
     eventPtr->xany.serial = LastKnownRequestProcessed(winPtr->display);
@@ -97,22 +96,22 @@ InitializeEvent(eventPtr, winPtr, type, x, y, state, detail)
     eventPtr->xcrossing.y_root = y;
 
     switch (type) {
-	case EnterNotify:
-	case LeaveNotify:
-	    eventPtr->xcrossing.mode = NotifyNormal;
-	    eventPtr->xcrossing.state = state;
-	    eventPtr->xcrossing.detail = detail;
-	    eventPtr->xcrossing.focus = False;
-	    break;
-	case MotionNotify:
-	    eventPtr->xmotion.state = state;
-	    eventPtr->xmotion.is_hint = detail;
-	    break;
-	case ButtonPress:
-	case ButtonRelease:
-	    eventPtr->xbutton.state = state;
-	    eventPtr->xbutton.button = detail;
-	    break;
+    case EnterNotify:
+    case LeaveNotify:
+	eventPtr->xcrossing.mode = NotifyNormal;
+	eventPtr->xcrossing.state = state;
+	eventPtr->xcrossing.detail = detail;
+	eventPtr->xcrossing.focus = False;
+	break;
+    case MotionNotify:
+	eventPtr->xmotion.state = state;
+	eventPtr->xmotion.is_hint = detail;
+	break;
+    case ButtonPress:
+    case ButtonRelease:
+	eventPtr->xbutton.state = state;
+	eventPtr->xbutton.button = detail;
+	break;
     }
     TkChangeEventWindow(eventPtr, winPtr);
 }
@@ -122,8 +121,8 @@ InitializeEvent(eventPtr, winPtr, type, x, y, state, detail)
  *
  * GenerateEnterLeave --
  *
- *	Update the current mouse window and position, and generate
- *	any enter/leave events that are needed.
+ *	Update the current mouse window and position, and generate any
+ *	enter/leave events that are needed.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns 1 if enter/leave events were generated.
@@ -135,14 +134,14 @@ InitializeEvent(eventPtr, winPtr, type, x, y, state, detail)
  */
 
 static int
-GenerateEnterLeave(winPtr, x, y, state)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Current Tk window (or NULL). */
-    int x,y;			/* Current mouse position in root coords. */
-    int state;			/* State flags. */
+GenerateEnterLeave(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,		/* Current Tk window (or NULL). */
+    int x, int y,		/* Current mouse position in root coords. */
+    int state)			/* State flags. */
 {
     int crossed = 0;		/* 1 if mouse crossed a window boundary */
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     TkWindow *restrictWinPtr = tsdPtr->restrictWinPtr;
     TkWindow *lastWinPtr = tsdPtr->lastWinPtr;
 
@@ -154,8 +153,8 @@ GenerateEnterLeave(winPtr, x, y, state)
 	    oldPos = TkPositionInTree(lastWinPtr, restrictWinPtr);
 
 	    /*
-	     * Check if the mouse crossed into or out of the restrict
-	     * window.  If so, we need to generate an Enter or Leave event.
+	     * Check if the mouse crossed into or out of the restrict window.
+	     * If so, we need to generate an Enter or Leave event.
 	     */
 
 	    if ((newPos != oldPos) && ((newPos == TK_GRAB_IN_TREE)
@@ -215,8 +214,8 @@ GenerateEnterLeave(winPtr, x, y, state)
  *
  * Tk_UpdatePointer --
  *
- *	This function updates the pointer state machine given an
- *	the current window, position and modifier state.
+ *	This function updates the pointer state machine given an the current
+ *	window, position and modifier state.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -228,14 +227,14 @@ GenerateEnterLeave(winPtr, x, y, state)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to which pointer event
-				 * is reported. May be NULL. */
-    int x, y;			/* Pointer location in root coords. */
-    int state;			/* Modifier state mask. */
+Tk_UpdatePointer(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window to which pointer event is reported.
+				 * May be NULL. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Pointer location in root coords. */
+    int state)			/* Modifier state mask. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *)tkwin;
     TkWindow *targetWinPtr;
     XPoint pos;
@@ -247,15 +246,15 @@ Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
     pos.y = y;
 
     /*
-     * Use the current keyboard state, but the old mouse button
-     * state since we haven't generated the button events yet.
+     * Use the current keyboard state, but the old mouse button state since we
+     * haven't generated the button events yet.
      */
 
     tsdPtr->lastState = (state & ~ALL_BUTTONS) | (tsdPtr->lastState
 	    & ALL_BUTTONS);
 
     /*
-     * Generate Enter/Leave events.  If the pointer has crossed window
+     * Generate Enter/Leave events. If the pointer has crossed window
      * boundaries, update the current mouse position so we don't generate
      * redundant motion events.
      */
@@ -272,17 +271,16 @@ Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
     for (b = Button1; b <= Button3; b++) {
 	mask = ButtonMask(b);
 	if (changes & mask) {
-	    if (state & mask) {	
+	    if (state & mask) {
 		type = ButtonPress;
 
-	        /*
+		/*
 		 * ButtonPress - Set restrict window if we aren't grabbed, or
 		 * if this is the first button down.
 		 */
 
 		if (!tsdPtr->restrictWinPtr) {
 		    if (!tsdPtr->grabWinPtr) {
-
 			/*
 			 * Mouse is not grabbed, so set a button grab.
 			 */
@@ -291,10 +289,9 @@ Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
 			TkpSetCapture(tsdPtr->restrictWinPtr);
 
 		    } else if ((tsdPtr->lastState & ALL_BUTTONS) == 0) {
-
 			/*
-			 * Mouse is in a non-button grab, so ensure
-			 * the button grab is inside the grab tree.
+			 * Mouse is in a non-button grab, so ensure the button
+			 * grab is inside the grab tree.
 			 */
 
 			if (TkPositionInTree(winPtr, tsdPtr->grabWinPtr)
@@ -310,7 +307,7 @@ Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
 	    } else {
 		type = ButtonRelease;
 
-	        /*
+		/*
 		 * ButtonRelease - Release the mouse capture and clear the
 		 * restrict window when the last button is released and we
 		 * aren't in a global grab.
@@ -323,9 +320,9 @@ Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
 		}
 
 		/*
-		 * If we are releasing a restrict window, then we need
-		 * to send the button event followed by mouse motion from
-		 * the restrict window to the current mouse position.
+		 * If we are releasing a restrict window, then we need to send
+		 * the button event followed by mouse motion from the restrict
+		 * window to the current mouse position.
 		 */
 
 		if (tsdPtr->restrictWinPtr) {
@@ -339,14 +336,14 @@ Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
 		    GenerateEnterLeave(winPtr, x, y, tsdPtr->lastState);
 		    tsdPtr->lastPos = pos;
 		    continue;
-		}		
+		}
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * If a restrict window is set, make sure the pointer event
-	     * is reported relative to that window.  Otherwise, if a
-	     * global grab is in effect then events outside of windows
-	     * managed by Tk should be reported to the grab window.
+	     * If a restrict window is set, make sure the pointer event is
+	     * reported relative to that window. Otherwise, if a global grab
+	     * is in effect then events outside of windows managed by Tk
+	     * should be reported to the grab window.
 	     */
 
 	    if (tsdPtr->restrictWinPtr) {
@@ -372,7 +369,7 @@ Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
 	     */
 
 	    tsdPtr->lastState = (type == ButtonPress)
-		? (tsdPtr->lastState | mask) : (tsdPtr->lastState & ~mask);
+		    ? (tsdPtr->lastState | mask) : (tsdPtr->lastState & ~mask);
 	    tsdPtr->lastPos = pos;
 	}
     }
@@ -392,8 +389,8 @@ Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
     UpdateCursor(targetWinPtr);
 
     /*
-     * If no other events caused the position to be updated,
-     * generate a motion event.
+     * If no other events caused the position to be updated, generate a motion
+     * event.
      */
 
     if (tsdPtr->lastPos.x != pos.x || tsdPtr->lastPos.y != pos.y) {
@@ -417,42 +414,41 @@ Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
  *
  * XGrabPointer --
  *
- *	Capture the mouse so event are reported outside of toplevels.
- *	Note that this is a very limited implementation that only
- *	supports GrabModeAsync and owner_events True.
+ *	Capture the mouse so event are reported outside of toplevels. Note
+ *	that this is a very limited implementation that only supports
+ *	GrabModeAsync and owner_events True.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Always returns GrabSuccess.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Turns on mouse capture, sets the global grab pointer, and
- *	clears any window restrictions.
+ *	Turns on mouse capture, sets the global grab pointer, and clears any
+ *	window restrictions.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-XGrabPointer(display, grab_window, owner_events, event_mask, pointer_mode,
-	keyboard_mode, confine_to, cursor, time)
-    Display* display;
-    Window grab_window;
-    Bool owner_events;
-    unsigned int event_mask;
-    int pointer_mode;
-    int keyboard_mode;
-    Window confine_to;
-    Cursor cursor;
-    Time time;
+XGrabPointer(
+    Display *display,
+    Window grab_window,
+    Bool owner_events,
+    unsigned int event_mask,
+    int pointer_mode,
+    int keyboard_mode,
+    Window confine_to,
+    Cursor cursor,
+    Time time)
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     display->request++;
     tsdPtr->grabWinPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_IdToWindow(display, grab_window);
     tsdPtr->restrictWinPtr = NULL;
     TkpSetCapture(tsdPtr->grabWinPtr);
-    if (TkPositionInTree(tsdPtr->lastWinPtr, tsdPtr->grabWinPtr) 
-            != TK_GRAB_IN_TREE) {
+    if (TkPositionInTree(tsdPtr->lastWinPtr, tsdPtr->grabWinPtr)
+	    != TK_GRAB_IN_TREE) {
 	UpdateCursor(tsdPtr->grabWinPtr);
     }
     return GrabSuccess;
@@ -475,12 +471,12 @@ XGrabPointer(display, grab_window, owner_events, event_mask, pointer_mode,
  */
 
 void
-XUngrabPointer(display, time)
-    Display* display;
-    Time time;
+XUngrabPointer(
+    Display *display,
+    Time time)
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     display->request++;
     tsdPtr->grabWinPtr = NULL;
@@ -506,11 +502,11 @@ XUngrabPointer(display, time)
  */
 
 void
-TkPointerDeadWindow(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;
+TkPointerDeadWindow(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (winPtr == tsdPtr->lastWinPtr) {
 	tsdPtr->lastWinPtr = NULL;
@@ -531,8 +527,8 @@ TkPointerDeadWindow(winPtr)
  *
  * UpdateCursor --
  *
- *	Set the windows global cursor to the cursor associated with
- *	the given Tk window.
+ *	Set the windows global cursor to the cursor associated with the given
+ *	Tk window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -544,17 +540,16 @@ TkPointerDeadWindow(winPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-UpdateCursor(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;
+UpdateCursor(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)
 {
     Cursor cursor = None;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     /*
-     * A window inherits its cursor from its parent if it doesn't
-     * have one of its own.  Top level windows inherit the default
-     * cursor.
+     * A window inherits its cursor from its parent if it doesn't have one of
+     * its own. Top level windows inherit the default cursor.
      */
 
     tsdPtr->cursorWinPtr = winPtr;
@@ -575,10 +570,9 @@ UpdateCursor(winPtr)
  *
  * XDefineCursor --
  *
- *	This function is called to update the cursor on a window.
- *	Since the mouse might be in the specified window, we need to
- *	check the specified window against the current mouse position
- *	and grab state.
+ *	This function is called to update the cursor on a window. Since the
+ *	mouse might be in the specified window, we need to check the specified
+ *	window against the current mouse position and grab state.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -590,14 +584,14 @@ UpdateCursor(winPtr)
  */
 
 void
-XDefineCursor(display, w, cursor)
-    Display* display;
-    Window w;
-    Cursor cursor;
+XDefineCursor(
+    Display *display,
+    Window w,
+    Cursor cursor)
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *)Tk_IdToWindow(display, w);
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (tsdPtr->cursorWinPtr == winPtr) {
 	UpdateCursor(winPtr);
@@ -610,10 +604,10 @@ XDefineCursor(display, w, cursor)
  *
  * TkGenerateActivateEvents --
  *
- *	This function is called by the Mac and Windows window manager
- *	routines when a toplevel window is activated or deactivated.
- *	Activate/Deactivate events will be sent to every subwindow of
- *	the toplevel followed by a FocusIn/FocusOut message.
+ *	This function is called by the Mac and Windows window manager routines
+ *	when a toplevel window is activated or deactivated.
+ *	Activate/Deactivate events will be sent to every subwindow of the
+ *	toplevel followed by a FocusIn/FocusOut message.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -625,16 +619,16 @@ XDefineCursor(display, w, cursor)
  */
 
 void
-TkGenerateActivateEvents(winPtr, active)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Toplevel to activate. */
-    int active;			/* Non-zero if the window is being
-				 * activated, else 0.*/
+TkGenerateActivateEvents(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,		/* Toplevel to activate. */
+    int active)			/* Non-zero if the window is being activated,
+				 * else 0.*/
 {
     XEvent event;
-    
-    /* 
-     * Generate Activate and Deactivate events.  This event
-     * is sent to every subwindow in a toplevel window.
+
+    /*
+     * Generate Activate and Deactivate events. This event is sent to every
+     * subwindow in a toplevel window.
      */
 
     event.xany.serial = winPtr->display->request++;
@@ -644,5 +638,12 @@ TkGenerateActivateEvents(winPtr, active)
 
     event.xany.type = active ? ActivateNotify : DeactivateNotify;
     TkQueueEventForAllChildren(winPtr, &event);
-    
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkScale.h b/generic/tkScale.h
index 723a40b..200ac08 100644
--- a/generic/tkScale.h
+++ b/generic/tkScale.h
@@ -1,16 +1,16 @@
 /*
  * tkScale.h --
  *
- *	Declarations of types and functions used to implement
- *	the scale widget.
+ *	Declarations of types and functions used to implement the scale
+ *	widget.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1999-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkScale.h,v 1.8 2000/04/14 08:33:16 hobbs Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkScale.h,v 1.9 2005/11/15 15:18:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #ifndef _TKSCALE
@@ -42,16 +42,16 @@ enum state {
 };
 
 /*
- * A data structure of the following type is kept for each scale
- * widget managed by this file:
+ * A data structure of the following type is kept for each scale widget
+ * managed by this file:
  */
 
 typedef struct TkScale {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the scale.  NULL
-				 * means that the window has been destroyed
-				 * but the data structures haven't yet been
-				 * cleaned up.*/
-    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget.  Used, among
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the scale. NULL means
+				 * that the window has been destroyed but the
+				 * data structures haven't yet been cleaned
+				 * up.*/
+    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget. Used, among
 				 * other things, so that resources can be
 				 * freed even after tkwin has gone away. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with scale. */
@@ -60,42 +60,41 @@ typedef struct TkScale {
 				 * available for this widget. */
     enum orient orient;		/* Orientation for window (vertical or
 				 * horizontal). */
-    int width;			/* Desired narrow dimension of scale,
-				 * in pixels. */
-    int length;			/* Desired long dimension of scale,
-				 * in pixels. */
+    int width;			/* Desired narrow dimension of scale, in
+				 * pixels. */
+    int length;			/* Desired long dimension of scale, in
+				 * pixels. */
     double value;		/* Current value of scale. */
-    Tcl_Obj *varNamePtr;	/* Name of variable or NULL.
-				 * If non-NULL, scale's value tracks
-				 * the contents of this variable and
-				 * vice versa. */
+    Tcl_Obj *varNamePtr;	/* Name of variable or NULL. If non-NULL,
+				 * scale's value tracks the contents of this
+				 * variable and vice versa. */
     double fromValue;		/* Value corresponding to left or top of
 				 * scale. */
-    double toValue;		/* Value corresponding to right or bottom
-				 * of scale. */
-    double tickInterval;	/* Distance between tick marks;
-				 * 0 means don't display any tick marks. */
-    double resolution;		/* If > 0, all values are rounded to an
-				 * even multiple of this value. */
-    int digits;			/* Number of significant digits to print
-				 * in values.  0 means we get to choose the
-				 * number based on resolution and/or the
-				 * range of the scale. */
+    double toValue;		/* Value corresponding to right or bottom of
+				 * scale. */
+    double tickInterval;	/* Distance between tick marks; 0 means don't
+				 * display any tick marks. */
+    double resolution;		/* If > 0, all values are rounded to an even
+				 * multiple of this value. */
+    int digits;			/* Number of significant digits to print in
+				 * values. 0 means we get to choose the number
+				 * based on resolution and/or the range of the
+				 * scale. */
     char format[10];		/* Sprintf conversion specifier computed from
 				 * digits and other information. */
-    double bigIncrement;	/* Amount to use for large increments to
-				 * scale value.	 (0 means we pick a value). */
+    double bigIncrement;	/* Amount to use for large increments to scale
+				 * value. (0 means we pick a value). */
     char *command;		/* Command prefix to use when invoking Tcl
 				 * commands because the scale value changed.
 				 * NULL means don't invoke commands. */
-    int repeatDelay;		/* How long to wait before auto-repeating
-				 * on scrolling actions (in ms). */
+    int repeatDelay;		/* How long to wait before auto-repeating on
+				 * scrolling actions (in ms). */
     int repeatInterval;		/* Interval between autorepeats (in ms). */
     char *label;		/* Label to display above or to right of
-				 * scale;  NULL means don't display a label. */
+				 * scale; NULL means don't display a label. */
     int labelLength;		/* Number of non-NULL chars. in label. */
     enum state state;		/* Values are active, normal, or disabled.
-				 * Value of scale cannot be changed when 
+				 * Value of scale cannot be changed when
 				 * disabled. */
 
     /*
@@ -106,19 +105,19 @@ typedef struct TkScale {
     Tk_3DBorder bgBorder;	/* Used for drawing slider and other
 				 * background areas. */
     Tk_3DBorder activeBorder;	/* For drawing the slider when active. */
-    int sliderRelief;		/* Is slider to be drawn raised, sunken, 
+    int sliderRelief;		/* Is slider to be drawn raised, sunken,
 				 * etc. */
     XColor *troughColorPtr;	/* Color for drawing trough. */
     GC troughGC;		/* For drawing trough. */
-    GC copyGC;			/* Used for copying from pixmap onto screen. */
+    GC copyGC;			/* Used for copying from pixmap onto screen */
     Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Information about text font, or NULL. */
     XColor *textColorPtr;	/* Color for drawing text. */
     GC textGC;			/* GC for drawing text in normal mode. */
     int relief;			/* Indicates whether window as a whole is
 				 * raised, sunken, or flat. */
-    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw
-				 * around widget when it has the focus.
-				 * <= 0 means don't draw a highlight. */
+    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw around
+				 * widget when it has the focus. <= 0 means
+				 * don't draw a highlight. */
     Tk_3DBorder highlightBorder;/* Value of -highlightbackground option:
 				 * specifies background with which to draw 3-D
 				 * default ring and focus highlight area when
@@ -126,18 +125,18 @@ typedef struct TkScale {
     XColor *highlightColorPtr;	/* Color for drawing traversal highlight. */
     int inset;			/* Total width of all borders, including
 				 * traversal highlight and 3-D border.
-				 * Indicates how much interior stuff must
-				 * be offset from outside edges to leave
-				 * room for borders. */
+				 * Indicates how much interior stuff must be
+				 * offset from outside edges to leave room for
+				 * borders. */
     int sliderLength;		/* Length of slider, measured in pixels along
 				 * long dimension of scale. */
     int showValue;		/* Non-zero means to display the scale value
-				 * below or to the left of the slider;	zero
+				 * below or to the left of the slider; zero
 				 * means don't display the value. */
 
     /*
-     * Layout information for horizontal scales, assuming that window
-     * gets the size it requested:
+     * Layout information for horizontal scales, assuming that window gets the
+     * size it requested:
      */
 
     int horizLabelY;		/* Y-coord at which to draw label. */
@@ -145,8 +144,8 @@ typedef struct TkScale {
     int horizTroughY;		/* Y-coord of top of slider trough. */
     int horizTickY;		/* Y-coord at which to draw tick text. */
     /*
-     * Layout information for vertical scales, assuming that window
-     * gets the size it requested:
+     * Layout information for vertical scales, assuming that window gets the
+     * size it requested:
      */
 
     int vertTickRightX;		/* X-location of right side of tick-marks. */
@@ -160,37 +159,37 @@ typedef struct TkScale {
 
     int fontHeight;		/* Height of scale font. */
     Tk_Cursor cursor;		/* Current cursor for window, or None. */
-    Tcl_Obj *takeFocusPtr;	/* Value of -takefocus option;	not used in
-				 * the C code, but used by keyboard traversal
-				 * scripts.  May be NULL. */
-    int flags;			/* Various flags;  see below for
+    Tcl_Obj *takeFocusPtr;	/* Value of -takefocus option; not used in the
+				 * C code, but used by keyboard traversal
+				 * scripts. May be NULL. */
+    int flags;			/* Various flags; see below for
 				 * definitions. */
 } TkScale;
 
 /*
  * Flag bits for scales:
  *
- * REDRAW_SLIDER -		1 means slider (and numerical readout) need
- *				to be redrawn.
+ * REDRAW_SLIDER -		1 means slider (and numerical readout) need to
+ *				be redrawn.
  * REDRAW_OTHER -		1 means other stuff besides slider and value
  *				need to be redrawn.
  * REDRAW_ALL -			1 means the entire widget needs to be redrawn.
  * REDRAW_PENDING -		1 means any sort of redraw is pending
- * ACTIVE -			1 means the widget is active (the mouse is
- *				in its window).
+ * ACTIVE -			1 means the widget is active (the mouse is in
+ *				its window).
  * INVOKE_COMMAND -		1 means the scale's command needs to be
- *				invoked during the next redisplay (the
- *				value of the scale has changed since the
- *				last time the command was invoked).
- * SETTING_VAR -		1 means that the associated variable is
- *				being set by us, so there's no need for
- *				ScaleVarProc to do anything.
- * NEVER_SET -			1 means that the scale's value has never
- *				been set before (so must invoke -command and
- *				set associated variable even if the value
- *				doesn't appear to have changed).
- * GOT_FOCUS -			1 means that the focus is currently in
- *				this widget.
+ *				invoked during the next redisplay (the value
+ *				of the scale has changed since the last time
+ *				the command was invoked).
+ * SETTING_VAR -		1 means that the associated variable is being
+ *				set by us, so there's no need for ScaleVarProc
+ *				to do anything.
+ * NEVER_SET -			1 means that the scale's value has never been
+ *				set before (so must invoke -command and set
+ *				associated variable even if the value doesn't
+ *				appear to have changed).
+ * GOT_FOCUS -			1 means that the focus is currently in this
+ *				widget.
  * SCALE_DELETED -		1 means the scale widget is being deleted
  */
 
@@ -206,8 +205,8 @@ typedef struct TkScale {
 #define SCALE_DELETED		(1<<8)
 
 /*
- * Symbolic values for the active parts of a slider.  These are
- * the values that may be returned by the ScaleElement procedure.
+ * Symbolic values for the active parts of a slider. These are the values that
+ * may be returned by the ScaleElement procedure.
  */
 
 #define OTHER		0
@@ -216,39 +215,32 @@ typedef struct TkScale {
 #define TROUGH2		3
 
 /*
- * Space to leave between scale area and text, and between text and
- * edge of window.
+ * Space to leave between scale area and text, and between text and edge of
+ * window.
  */
 
 #define SPACING 2
 
 /*
- * How many characters of space to provide when formatting the
- * scale's value:
+ * How many characters of space to provide when formatting the scale's value:
  */
 
 #define PRINT_CHARS 150
 
 /*
- * Declaration of procedures used in the implementation of the scale
- * widget. 
+ * Declaration of procedures used in the implementation of the scale widget.
  */
 
-EXTERN void		TkEventuallyRedrawScale _ANSI_ARGS_((TkScale *scalePtr,
-			    int what));
-EXTERN double		TkRoundToResolution _ANSI_ARGS_((TkScale *scalePtr,
-			    double value));
-EXTERN TkScale *	TkpCreateScale _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
-EXTERN void		TkpDestroyScale _ANSI_ARGS_((TkScale *scalePtr));
-EXTERN void		TkpDisplayScale _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-EXTERN int		TkpScaleElement _ANSI_ARGS_((TkScale *scalePtr,
-			     int x, int y));
-EXTERN void		TkScaleSetValue _ANSI_ARGS_((TkScale *scalePtr,
-			    double value, int setVar, int invokeCommand));
-EXTERN double		TkScalePixelToValue _ANSI_ARGS_((TkScale *scalePtr, 
-			    int x, int y));
-EXTERN int		TkScaleValueToPixel _ANSI_ARGS_((TkScale *scalePtr,
-			    double value));
+EXTERN void		TkEventuallyRedrawScale(TkScale *scalePtr, int what);
+EXTERN double		TkRoundToResolution(TkScale *scalePtr, double value);
+EXTERN TkScale *	TkpCreateScale(Tk_Window tkwin);
+EXTERN void		TkpDestroyScale(TkScale *scalePtr);
+EXTERN void		TkpDisplayScale(ClientData clientData);
+EXTERN int		TkpScaleElement(TkScale *scalePtr, int x, int y);
+EXTERN void		TkScaleSetValue(TkScale *scalePtr, double value,
+			    int setVar, int invokeCommand);
+EXTERN double		TkScalePixelToValue(TkScale *scalePtr, int x, int y);
+EXTERN int		TkScaleValueToPixel(TkScale *scalePtr, double value);
 
 # undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
 # define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
diff --git a/generic/tkSelect.h b/generic/tkSelect.h
index 72fdad6..c2ab33f 100644
--- a/generic/tkSelect.h
+++ b/generic/tkSelect.h
@@ -1,15 +1,15 @@
 /*
  * tkSelect.h --
  *
- *	Declarations of types shared among the files that implement
- *	selection support.
+ *	Declarations of types shared among the files that implement selection
+ *	support.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkSelect.h,v 1.4 1999/05/25 20:40:54 stanton Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkSelect.h,v 1.5 2005/11/15 15:18:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #ifndef _TKSELECT
@@ -18,142 +18,134 @@
 /*
  * When a selection is owned by a window on a given display, one of the
  * following structures is present on a list of current selections in the
- * display structure.  The structure is used to record the current owner of
- * a selection for use in later retrieval requests.  There is a list of
- * such structures because a display can have multiple different selections
- * active at the same time.
+ * display structure. The structure is used to record the current owner of a
+ * selection for use in later retrieval requests. There is a list of such
+ * structures because a display can have multiple different selections active
+ * at the same time.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkSelectionInfo {
     Atom selection;		/* Selection name, e.g. XA_PRIMARY. */
     Tk_Window owner;		/* Current owner of this selection. */
     int serial;			/* Serial number of last XSelectionSetOwner
-				 * request made to server for this
-				 * selection (used to filter out redundant
+				 * request made to server for this selection
+				 * (used to filter out redundant
 				 * SelectionClear events). */
     Time time;			/* Timestamp used to acquire selection. */
     Tk_LostSelProc *clearProc;	/* Procedure to call when owner loses
 				 * selection. */
     ClientData clearData;	/* Info to pass to clearProc. */
     struct TkSelectionInfo *nextPtr;
-				/* Next in list of current selections on
-                                 * this display.  NULL means end of list */
+				/* Next in list of current selections on this
+                                 * display. NULL means end of list */
 } TkSelectionInfo;
 
 /*
- * One of the following structures exists for each selection handler
- * created for a window by calling Tk_CreateSelHandler.  The handlers
- * are linked in a list rooted in the TkWindow structure.
+ * One of the following structures exists for each selection handler created
+ * for a window by calling Tk_CreateSelHandler. The handlers are linked in a
+ * list rooted in the TkWindow structure.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkSelHandler {
     Atom selection;		/* Selection name, e.g. XA_PRIMARY */
-    Atom target;		/* Target type for selection
-				 * conversion, such as TARGETS or
-				 * STRING. */
-    Atom format;		/* Format in which selection
-				 * info will be returned, such
-				 * as STRING or ATOM. */
-    Tk_SelectionProc *proc;	/* Procedure to generate selection
-				 * in this format. */
+    Atom target;		/* Target type for selection conversion, such
+				 * as TARGETS or STRING. */
+    Atom format;		/* Format in which selection info will be
+				 * returned, such as STRING or ATOM. */
+    Tk_SelectionProc *proc;	/* Procedure to generate selection in this
+				 * format. */
     ClientData clientData;	/* Argument to pass to proc. */
-    int size;			/* Size of units returned by proc
-				 * (8 for STRING, 32 for almost
-				 * anything else). */
+    int size;			/* Size of units returned by proc (8 for
+				 * STRING, 32 for almost anything else). */
     struct TkSelHandler *nextPtr;
-				/* Next selection handler associated
-				 * with same window (NULL for end of
-				 * list). */
+				/* Next selection handler associated with same
+				 * window (NULL for end of list). */
 } TkSelHandler;
 
 /*
- * When the selection is being retrieved, one of the following
- * structures is present on a list of pending selection retrievals.
- * The structure is used to communicate between the background
- * procedure that requests the selection and the foreground
- * event handler that processes the events in which the selection
- * is returned.  There is a list of such structures so that there
- * can be multiple simultaneous selection retrievals (e.g. on
- * different displays).
+ * When the selection is being retrieved, one of the following structures is
+ * present on a list of pending selection retrievals. The structure is used to
+ * communicate between the background procedure that requests the selection
+ * and the foreground event handler that processes the events in which the
+ * selection is returned. There is a list of such structures so that there can
+ * be multiple simultaneous selection retrievals (e.g. on different displays).
  */
 
 typedef struct TkSelRetrievalInfo {
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window used as requestor for
-				 * selection. */
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window used as requestor for selection. */
     Atom selection;		/* Selection being requested. */
     Atom property;		/* Property where selection will appear. */
     Atom target;		/* Desired form for selection. */
     int (*proc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
-	char *portion));	/* Procedure to call to handle pieces
-				 * of selection. */
+	char *portion));	/* Procedure to call to handle pieces of
+				 * selection. */
     ClientData clientData;	/* Argument for proc. */
-    int result;			/* Initially -1.  Set to a Tcl
-				 * return value once the selection
-				 * has been retrieved. */
+    int result;			/* Initially -1. Set to a Tcl return value
+				 * once the selection has been retrieved. */
     Tcl_TimerToken timeout;	/* Token for current timeout procedure. */
-    int idleTime;		/* Number of seconds that have gone by
-				 * without hearing anything from the
-				 * selection owner. */
+    int idleTime;		/* Number of seconds that have gone by without
+				 * hearing anything from the selection
+				 * owner. */
     Tcl_EncodingState encState;	/* Holds intermediate state during translations
 				 * of data that cross buffer boundaries. */
     int encFlags;		/* Encoding translation state flags. */
     Tcl_DString buf;		/* Buffer to hold translation data. */
     struct TkSelRetrievalInfo *nextPtr;
-				/* Next in list of all pending
-				 * selection retrievals.  NULL means
-				 * end of list. */
+				/* Next in list of all pending selection
+				 * retrievals. NULL means end of list. */
 } TkSelRetrievalInfo;
 
 /*
- * The clipboard contains a list of buffers of various types and formats.
- * All of the buffers of a given type will be returned in sequence when the
- * CLIPBOARD selection is retrieved.  All buffers of a given type on the
- * same clipboard must have the same format.  The TkClipboardTarget structure
- * is used to record the information about a chain of buffers of the same
- * type.
+ * The clipboard contains a list of buffers of various types and formats. All
+ * of the buffers of a given type will be returned in sequence when the
+ * CLIPBOARD selection is retrieved. All buffers of a given type on the same
+ * clipboard must have the same format. The TkClipboardTarget structure is
+ * used to record the information about a chain of buffers of the same type.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkClipboardBuffer {
-    char *buffer;			/* Null terminated data buffer. */
-    long length;			/* Length of string in buffer. */
-    struct TkClipboardBuffer *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of buffers.  NULL
-					 * means end of list . */
+    char *buffer;		/* Null terminated data buffer. */
+    long length;		/* Length of string in buffer. */
+    struct TkClipboardBuffer *nextPtr;
+				/* Next in list of buffers. NULL means end of
+				 * list . */
 } TkClipboardBuffer;
 
 typedef struct TkClipboardTarget {
-    Atom type;				/* Type conversion supported. */
-    Atom format;			/* Representation used for data. */
-    TkClipboardBuffer *firstBufferPtr;	/* First in list of data buffers. */
-    TkClipboardBuffer *lastBufferPtr;	/* Last in list of clipboard buffers.
-					 * Used to speed up appends. */
-    struct TkClipboardTarget *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of targets on
-					 * clipboard.  NULL means end of
-					 * list. */
+    Atom type;			/* Type conversion supported. */
+    Atom format;		/* Representation used for data. */
+    TkClipboardBuffer *firstBufferPtr;
+				/* First in list of data buffers. */
+    TkClipboardBuffer *lastBufferPtr;
+				/* Last in list of clipboard buffers. Used to
+				 * speed up appends. */
+    struct TkClipboardTarget *nextPtr;
+				/* Next in list of targets on clipboard. NULL
+				 * means end of list. */
 } TkClipboardTarget;
 
 /*
  * It is possible for a Tk_SelectionProc to delete the handler that it
- * represents.  If this happens, the code that is retrieving the selection
- * needs to know about it so it doesn't use the now-defunct handler
- * structure.  One structure of the following form is created for each
- * retrieval in progress, so that the retriever can find out if its
- * handler is deleted.  All of the pending retrievals (if there are more
- * than one) are linked into a list.
+ * represents. If this happens, the code that is retrieving the selection
+ * needs to know about it so it doesn't use the now-defunct handler structure.
+ * One structure of the following form is created for each retrieval in
+ * progress, so that the retriever can find out if its handler is deleted. All
+ * of the pending retrievals (if there are more than one) are linked into a
+ * list.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkSelInProgress {
-    TkSelHandler *selPtr;	/* Handler being executed.  If this handler
-				 * is deleted, the field is set to NULL. */
+    TkSelHandler *selPtr;	/* Handler being executed. If this handler is
+				 * deleted, the field is set to NULL. */
     struct TkSelInProgress *nextPtr;
 				/* Next higher nested search. */
 } TkSelInProgress;
 
 /*
- * Chunk size for retrieving selection.  It's defined both in
- * words and in bytes;  the word size is used to allocate
- * buffer space that's guaranteed to be word-aligned and that
- * has an extra character for the terminating NULL.
+ * Chunk size for retrieving selection. It's defined both in words and in
+ * bytes; the word size is used to allocate buffer space that's guaranteed to
+ * be word-aligned and that has an extra character for the terminating NULL.
  */
 
 #define TK_SEL_BYTES_AT_ONCE 4000
@@ -164,22 +156,18 @@ typedef struct TkSelInProgress {
  * but shouldn't be used anywhere else in Tk (or by Tk clients):
  */
 
-extern TkSelInProgress * 
-                        TkSelGetInProgress _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
-extern void             TkSelSetInProgress _ANSI_ARGS_((
-                            TkSelInProgress *pendingPtr));
-
-extern void		TkSelClearSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-extern int		TkSelDefaultSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkSelectionInfo *infoPtr, Atom target,
-			    char *buffer, int maxBytes, Atom *typePtr));
-extern int		TkSelGetSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target,
-			    Tk_GetSelProc *proc, ClientData clientData));
+extern TkSelInProgress *TkSelGetInProgress(void);
+extern void             TkSelSetInProgress(TkSelInProgress *pendingPtr);
+extern void		TkSelClearSelection(Tk_Window tkwin, XEvent *eventPtr);
+extern int		TkSelDefaultSelection(TkSelectionInfo *infoPtr,
+			    Atom target, char *buffer, int maxBytes,
+			    Atom *typePtr);
+extern int		TkSelGetSelection(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Atom selection, Atom target, Tk_GetSelProc *proc,
+			    ClientData clientData);
 #ifndef TkSelUpdateClipboard
-extern void		TkSelUpdateClipboard _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-			    TkClipboardTarget *targetPtr));
+extern void		TkSelUpdateClipboard(TkWindow *winPtr,
+			    TkClipboardTarget *targetPtr);
 #endif
 
 #endif /* _TKSELECT */
diff --git a/generic/tkSquare.c b/generic/tkSquare.c
index d3b6f04..0b984dd 100644
--- a/generic/tkSquare.c
+++ b/generic/tkSquare.c
@@ -1,18 +1,18 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkSquare.c --
  *
- *	This module implements "square" widgets that are object
- *	based.  A "square" is a widget that displays a single square that can 
- *	be moved around and resized.  This file is intended as an example
- *	of how to build a widget;  it isn't included in the
- *	normal wish, but it is included in "tktest".
+ *	This module implements "square" widgets that are object based. A
+ *	"square" is a widget that displays a single square that can be moved
+ *	around and resized. This file is intended as an example of how to
+ *	build a widget; it isn't included in the normal wish, but it is
+ *	included in "tktest".
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkSquare.c,v 1.5 2002/01/17 23:33:53 dgp Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkSquare.c,v 1.6 2005/11/15 15:18:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkPort.h"
@@ -21,14 +21,14 @@
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
 /*
- * A data structure of the following type is kept for each square
- * widget managed by this file:
+ * A data structure of the following type is kept for each square widget
+ * managed by this file:
  */
 
 typedef struct {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the square.  NULL
-				 * means window has been deleted but
-				 * widget record hasn't been cleaned up yet. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the square. NULL means
+				 * window has been deleted but widget record
+				 * hasn't been cleaned up yet. */
     Display *display;		/* X's token for the window's display. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with widget. */
     Tcl_Command widgetCmd;	/* Token for square's widget command. */
@@ -49,11 +49,11 @@ typedef struct {
     Tcl_Obj *reliefPtr;
     GC gc;			/* Graphics context for copying from
 				 * off-screen pixmap onto screen. */
-    Tcl_Obj *doubleBufferPtr;	/* Non-zero means double-buffer redisplay
-				 * with pixmap;  zero means draw straight
-				 * onto the display. */
-    int updatePending;		/* Non-zero means a call to SquareDisplay
-				 * has already been scheduled. */
+    Tcl_Obj *doubleBufferPtr;	/* Non-zero means double-buffer redisplay with
+				 * pixmap; zero means draw straight onto the
+				 * display. */
+    int updatePending;		/* Non-zero means a call to SquareDisplay has
+				 * already been scheduled. */
 } Square;
 
 /*
@@ -64,16 +64,16 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
 	    "#d9d9d9", Tk_Offset(Square, bgBorderPtr), -1, 0,
 	    (ClientData) "white"},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	    (char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth"},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	    (char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background"},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0,
+	    (ClientData) "-borderwidth"},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0,
+	    (ClientData) "-background"},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
 	    "2", Tk_Offset(Square, borderWidthPtr), -1},
     {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-dbl", "doubleBuffer", "DoubleBuffer",
 	    "1", Tk_Offset(Square, doubleBufferPtr), -1},
-    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	    (char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground"},
+    {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0,
+	    (ClientData) "-foreground"},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
 	    "#b03060", Tk_Offset(Square, fgBorderPtr), -1, 0,
 	    (ClientData) "black"},
@@ -92,28 +92,26 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
  * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
  */
 
-int			SquareObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]));
-static void		SquareDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static int		SquareConfigure _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Square *squarePtr));
-static void		SquareDestroy _ANSI_ARGS_((char *memPtr));
-static void		SquareDisplay _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void		KeepInWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Square *squarePtr));
-static void		SquareObjEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static int		SquareWidgetObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]));
+int			SquareObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]);
+static void		SquareDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static int		SquareConfigure(Tcl_Interp *interp, Square *squarePtr);
+static void		SquareDestroy(char *memPtr);
+static void		SquareDisplay(ClientData clientData);
+static void		KeepInWindow(Square *squarePtr);
+static void		SquareObjEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static int		SquareWidgetObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *, int objc, Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[]);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * SquareCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "square" Tcl
- *	command.  It creates a new "square" widget.
+ *	This procedure is invoked to process the "square" Tcl command. It
+ *	creates a new "square" widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -125,11 +123,11 @@ static int		SquareWidgetObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
  */
 
 int
-SquareObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* NULL. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+SquareObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* NULL. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Square *squarePtr;
     Tk_Window tkwin;
@@ -140,39 +138,38 @@ SquareObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp), 
-	    Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[1], NULL), (char *) NULL);
+    tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
+	    Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), NULL);
     if (tkwin == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     Tk_SetClass(tkwin, "Square");
 
     /*
-     * Create the option table for this widget class.  If it has
-     * already been created, the refcount will get bumped and just
-     * the pointer will be returned.  The refcount getting bumped
-     * does not concern us, because Tk will ensure the table is
-     * deleted when the interpreter is destroyed.
+     * Create the option table for this widget class. If it has already been
+     * created, the refcount will get bumped and just the pointer will be
+     * returned. The refcount getting bumped does not concern us, because Tk
+     * will ensure the table is deleted when the interpreter is destroyed.
      */
 
     optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs);
 
     /*
-     * Allocate and initialize the widget record.  The memset allows
-     * us to set just the non-NULL/0 items.
+     * Allocate and initialize the widget record. The memset allows us to set
+     * just the non-NULL/0 items.
      */
 
-    squarePtr			= (Square *) ckalloc(sizeof(Square));
+    squarePtr = (Square *) ckalloc(sizeof(Square));
     memset((void *) squarePtr, 0, (sizeof(Square)));
 
-    squarePtr->tkwin		= tkwin;
-    squarePtr->display		= Tk_Display(tkwin);
-    squarePtr->interp		= interp;
-    squarePtr->widgetCmd	= Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
+    squarePtr->tkwin = tkwin;
+    squarePtr->display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    squarePtr->interp = interp;
+    squarePtr->widgetCmd = Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
 	    Tk_PathName(squarePtr->tkwin), SquareWidgetObjCmd,
 	    (ClientData) squarePtr, SquareDeletedProc);
-    squarePtr->gc		= None;
-    squarePtr->optionTable	= optionTable;
+    squarePtr->gc = None;
+    squarePtr->optionTable = optionTable;
 
     if (Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) squarePtr, optionTable, tkwin)
 	    != TCL_OK) {
@@ -184,7 +181,7 @@ SquareObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     Tk_CreateEventHandler(squarePtr->tkwin, ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask,
 	    SquareObjEventProc, (ClientData) squarePtr);
     if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) squarePtr, optionTable, objc - 2,
-	    objv + 2, tkwin, NULL, (int *) NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+	    objv + 2, tkwin, NULL, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
 	goto error;
     }
     if (SquareConfigure(interp, squarePtr) != TCL_OK) {
@@ -195,7 +192,7 @@ SquareObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(squarePtr->tkwin), -1));
     return TCL_OK;
 
-error:
+  error:
     Tk_DestroyWindow(squarePtr->tkwin);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -205,9 +202,9 @@ error:
  *
  * SquareWidgetObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to a widget managed by this module.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a widget managed by this module. See the user documentation for
+ *	details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -219,15 +216,15 @@ error:
  */
 
 static int
-SquareWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Information about square widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[];		/* Argument objects. */
+SquareWidgetObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about square widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj * CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Square *squarePtr = (Square *) clientData;
     int result = TCL_OK;
-    static CONST char *squareOptions[] = {"cget", "configure", (char *) NULL};
+    static CONST char *squareOptions[] = {"cget", "configure", NULL};
     enum {
 	SQUARE_CGET, SQUARE_CONFIGURE
     };
@@ -245,58 +242,55 @@ SquareWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) squarePtr);
-    
+
     switch (index) {
-	case SQUARE_CGET: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
-		goto error;
+    case SQUARE_CGET:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	resultObjPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) squarePtr,
+		squarePtr->optionTable, objv[2], squarePtr->tkwin);
+	if (resultObjPtr == NULL) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObjPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+    case SQUARE_CONFIGURE:
+	resultObjPtr = NULL;
+	if (objc == 2) {
+	    resultObjPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) squarePtr,
+		    squarePtr->optionTable, NULL, squarePtr->tkwin);
+	    if (resultObjPtr == NULL) {
+		result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    resultObjPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) squarePtr,
+	} else if (objc == 3) {
+	    resultObjPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) squarePtr,
 		    squarePtr->optionTable, objv[2], squarePtr->tkwin);
 	    if (resultObjPtr == NULL) {
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
-	    } else {
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObjPtr);
 	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case SQUARE_CONFIGURE: {
-	    resultObjPtr = NULL;
-	    if (objc == 2) {
-		resultObjPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) squarePtr,
-			squarePtr->optionTable, (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
-			squarePtr->tkwin);
-		if (resultObjPtr == NULL) {
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    } else if (objc == 3) {
-		resultObjPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) squarePtr,
-			squarePtr->optionTable, objv[2], squarePtr->tkwin);
-		if (resultObjPtr == NULL) {
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    } else {
-		result = Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) squarePtr,
-			squarePtr->optionTable, objc - 2, objv + 2,
-			squarePtr->tkwin, NULL, (int *) NULL);
-		if (result == TCL_OK) {
-		    result = SquareConfigure(interp, squarePtr);
-		}
-		if (!squarePtr->updatePending) {
-		    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(SquareDisplay, (ClientData) squarePtr);
-		    squarePtr->updatePending = 1;
-		}
+	} else {
+	    result = Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char *) squarePtr,
+		    squarePtr->optionTable, objc - 2, objv + 2,
+		    squarePtr->tkwin, NULL, NULL);
+	    if (result == TCL_OK) {
+		result = SquareConfigure(interp, squarePtr);
 	    }
-	    if (resultObjPtr != NULL) {
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObjPtr);
+	    if (!squarePtr->updatePending) {
+		Tcl_DoWhenIdle(SquareDisplay, (ClientData) squarePtr);
+		squarePtr->updatePending = 1;
 	    }
 	}
+	if (resultObjPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObjPtr);
+	}
     }
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) squarePtr);
     return result;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) squarePtr);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -306,37 +300,36 @@ SquareWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * SquareConfigure --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an argv/argc list in
- *	conjunction with the Tk option database to configure (or
- *	reconfigure) a square widget.
+ *	This procedure is called to process an argv/argc list in conjunction
+ *	with the Tk option database to configure (or reconfigure) a square
+ *	widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width,
- *	etc. get set for squarePtr;  old resources get freed,
- *	if there were any.
+ *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width, etc. get set
+ *	for squarePtr; old resources get freed, if there were any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-SquareConfigure(interp, squarePtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Square *squarePtr;			/* Information about widget. */
+SquareConfigure(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Square *squarePtr)		/* Information about widget. */
 {
     int borderWidth;
     Tk_3DBorder bgBorder;
     int doubleBuffer;
 
     /*
-     * Set the background for the window and create a graphics context
-     * for use during redisplay.
+     * Set the background for the window and create a graphics context for use
+     * during redisplay.
      */
 
-    bgBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(squarePtr->tkwin, 
+    bgBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(squarePtr->tkwin,
 	    squarePtr->bgBorderPtr);
     Tk_SetWindowBackground(squarePtr->tkwin,
 	    Tk_3DBorderColor(bgBorder)->pixel);
@@ -350,8 +343,8 @@ SquareConfigure(interp, squarePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Register the desired geometry for the window.  Then arrange for
-     * the window to be redisplayed.
+     * Register the desired geometry for the window. Then arrange for the
+     * window to be redisplayed.
      */
 
     Tk_GeometryRequest(squarePtr->tkwin, 200, 150);
@@ -371,23 +364,23 @@ SquareConfigure(interp, squarePtr)
  *
  * SquareObjEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various
- *	events on squares.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various events on
+ *	squares.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up. When
+ *	it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-SquareObjEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+SquareObjEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
     Square *squarePtr = (Square *) clientData;
 
@@ -425,9 +418,9 @@ SquareObjEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * SquareDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted.  If
- *	the widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed,
- *	this command destroys it.
+ *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted. If the
+ *	widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed, this command
+ *	destroys it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -439,17 +432,17 @@ SquareObjEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-SquareDeletedProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
+SquareDeletedProc(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to widget record for widget. */
 {
     Square *squarePtr = (Square *) clientData;
     Tk_Window tkwin = squarePtr->tkwin;
 
     /*
-     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was
-     * destroyed and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin
-     * is NULL) or because the command was deleted, and then this procedure
-     * destroys the widget.
+     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
+     * and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin is NULL) or
+     * because the command was deleted, and then this procedure destroys the
+     * widget.
      */
 
     if (tkwin != NULL) {
@@ -462,9 +455,9 @@ SquareDeletedProc(clientData)
  *
  * SquareDisplay --
  *
- *	This procedure redraws the contents of a square window.
- *	It is invoked as a do-when-idle handler, so it only runs
- *	when there's nothing else for the application to do.
+ *	This procedure redraws the contents of a square window. It is invoked
+ *	as a do-when-idle handler, so it only runs when there's nothing else
+ *	for the application to do.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -476,8 +469,8 @@ SquareDeletedProc(clientData)
  */
 
 static void
-SquareDisplay(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
+SquareDisplay(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about window. */
 {
     Square *squarePtr = (Square *) clientData;
     Tk_Window tkwin = squarePtr->tkwin;
@@ -512,7 +505,7 @@ SquareDisplay(clientData)
 
     Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->tkwin, squarePtr->borderWidthPtr,
 	    &borderWidth);
-    bgBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(squarePtr->tkwin, 
+    bgBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(squarePtr->tkwin,
 	    squarePtr->bgBorderPtr);
     Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->reliefPtr, &relief);
     Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, bgBorder, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin),
@@ -523,9 +516,9 @@ SquareDisplay(clientData)
      */
 
     Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->tkwin, squarePtr->sizeObjPtr, &size);
-    fgBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(squarePtr->tkwin, 
+    fgBorder = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(squarePtr->tkwin,
 	    squarePtr->fgBorderPtr);
-    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, fgBorder, squarePtr->x, squarePtr->y, size, 
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, d, fgBorder, squarePtr->x, squarePtr->y, size,
 	    size, borderWidth, TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
 
     /*
@@ -545,9 +538,9 @@ SquareDisplay(clientData)
  *
  * SquareDestroy --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release
- *	to clean up the internal structure of a square at a safe time
- *	(when no-one is using it anymore).
+ *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release to
+ *	clean up the internal structure of a square at a safe time (when
+ *	no-one is using it anymore).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -559,11 +552,11 @@ SquareDisplay(clientData)
  */
 
 static void
-SquareDestroy(memPtr)
-    char *memPtr;		/* Info about square widget. */
+SquareDestroy(
+    char *memPtr)		/* Info about square widget. */
 {
     Square *squarePtr = (Square *) memPtr;
-    
+
     ckfree((char *) squarePtr);
 }
 
@@ -572,31 +565,31 @@ SquareDestroy(memPtr)
  *
  * KeepInWindow --
  *
- *	Adjust the position of the square if necessary to keep it in
- *	the widget's window.
+ *	Adjust the position of the square if necessary to keep it in the
+ *	widget's window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The x and y position of the square are adjusted if necessary
- *	to keep the square in the window.
+ *	The x and y position of the square are adjusted if necessary to keep
+ *	the square in the window.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-KeepInWindow(squarePtr)
-    register Square *squarePtr;		/* Pointer to widget record. */
+KeepInWindow(
+    register Square *squarePtr)	/* Pointer to widget record. */
 {
     int i, bd, relief;
     int borderWidth, size;
 
     Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->tkwin, squarePtr->borderWidthPtr,
 	    &borderWidth);
-    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->tkwin, squarePtr->xPtr, 
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->tkwin, squarePtr->xPtr,
 	    &squarePtr->x);
-    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->tkwin, squarePtr->yPtr, 
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->tkwin, squarePtr->yPtr,
 	    &squarePtr->y);
     Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->tkwin, squarePtr->sizeObjPtr, &size);
     Tk_GetReliefFromObj(NULL, squarePtr->reliefPtr, &relief);
@@ -619,3 +612,11 @@ KeepInWindow(squarePtr)
 	squarePtr->y = bd;
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkStubImg.c b/generic/tkStubImg.c
index 627f302..88b7efe 100644
--- a/generic/tkStubImg.c
+++ b/generic/tkStubImg.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkStubImg.c --
  *
  *	Stub object that will be statically linked into extensions that wish
@@ -7,10 +7,10 @@
  * Copyright (c) 1999 Jan Nijtmans.
  * Copyright (c) 1998-1999 by Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkStubImg.c,v 1.3 2003/01/09 01:00:36 dgp Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkStubImg.c,v 1.4 2005/11/15 15:18:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tcl.h"
@@ -21,14 +21,13 @@
  *
  * Tk_InitImageArgs --
  *
- *	Performs the necessary conversion from Tcl_Obj's to strings
- *      in the createProc for Tcl_CreateImageType. If running under
- *      Tk 8.2 or earlier without the Img-patch, this function has
- *      no effect.
+ *	Performs the necessary conversion from Tcl_Obj's to strings in the
+ *	createProc for Tcl_CreateImageType. If running under Tk 8.2 or earlier
+ *	without the Img-patch, this function has no effect.
  *
  * Results:
- *	argvPtr will point to an argument list which is guaranteed to
- *	contain strings, no matter what Tk version is running.
+ *	argvPtr will point to an argument list which is guaranteed to contain
+ *	strings, no matter what Tk version is running.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None
@@ -41,10 +40,10 @@
 #endif
 
 void
-Tk_InitImageArgs(interp, argc, argvPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    int argc;
-    char ***argvPtr;
+Tk_InitImageArgs(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    int argc,
+    char ***argvPtr)
 {
     static int useNewImage = -1;
     static char **argv = NULL;
@@ -56,7 +55,13 @@ Tk_InitImageArgs(interp, argc, argvPtr)
 
     if (useNewImage < 0) {
 	Tcl_CmdInfo cmdInfo;
-	if (!tclStubsPtr->tcl_GetCommandInfo(interp,"image", &cmdInfo)) {
+
+	/*
+	 * Note that this is *not* safe; users are free to rename the [image]
+	 * command. Sometime should fix to use assocData instead?
+	 */
+
+	if (!tclStubsPtr->tcl_GetCommandInfo(interp, "image", &cmdInfo)) {
 	    tclStubsPtr->tcl_Panic("cannot find the \"image\" command");
 	}
 	if (cmdInfo.isNativeObjectProc == 1) {
@@ -67,6 +72,7 @@ Tk_InitImageArgs(interp, argc, argvPtr)
     }
     if (useNewImage && (argc > 0)) {
 	int i;
+
 	argv = (char **) tclStubsPtr->tcl_Alloc(argc * sizeof(char *));
 	for (i = 0; i < argc; i++) {
 	    argv[i] = tclStubsPtr->tcl_GetString((Tcl_Obj *)(*argvPtr)[i]);
@@ -74,3 +80,11 @@ Tk_InitImageArgs(interp, argc, argvPtr)
 	*argvPtr = (char **) argv;
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkStyle.c b/generic/tkStyle.c
index ccbb9a5..e38abfa 100644
--- a/generic/tkStyle.c
+++ b/generic/tkStyle.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkStyle.c --
  *
  *	This file implements the widget styles and themes support.
@@ -6,93 +6,93 @@
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkStyle.c,v 1.4 2003/10/06 21:19:30 jenglish Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkStyle.c,v 1.5 2005/11/15 15:18:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
 /*
- * The following structure is used to cache widget option specs matching an 
+ * The following structure is used to cache widget option specs matching an
  * element's required options defined by Tk_ElementOptionSpecs. It also holds
  * information behind Tk_StyledElement opaque tokens.
  */
 
 typedef struct StyledWidgetSpec {
-    struct StyledElement *elementPtr;	/* Pointer to the element holding this
-					 * structure. */
-    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;		/* Option table for the widget class 
-					 * using the element. */
-    CONST Tk_OptionSpec **optionsPtr;	/* Table of option spec pointers, 
-					 * matching the option list provided 
-					 * during element registration. 
-					 * Malloc'd. */
+    struct StyledElement *elementPtr;
+				/* Pointer to the element holding this
+				 * structure. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Option table for the widget class using the
+				 * element. */
+    CONST Tk_OptionSpec **optionsPtr;
+				/* Table of option spec pointers, matching the
+				 * option list provided during element
+				 * registration. Malloc'd. */
 } StyledWidgetSpec;
 
 /*
- * Elements are declared using static templates. But static
- * information must be completed by dynamic information only
- * accessible at runtime. For each registered element, an instance of
- * the following structure is stored in each style engine and used to
- * cache information about the widget types (identified by their
- * optionTable) that use the given element.
+ * Elements are declared using static templates. But static information must
+ * be completed by dynamic information only accessible at runtime. For each
+ * registered element, an instance of the following structure is stored in
+ * each style engine and used to cache information about the widget types
+ * (identified by their optionTable) that use the given element.
  */
 
 typedef struct StyledElement {
-    struct Tk_ElementSpec *specPtr;	
-				/* Filled with template provided during 
-				 * registration. NULL means no implementation 
-				 * is available for the current engine. */ 
-    int nbWidgetSpecs;		/* Size of the array below. Number of distinct 
-				 * widget classes (actually, distinct option 
+    struct Tk_ElementSpec *specPtr;
+				/* Filled with template provided during
+				 * registration. NULL means no implementation
+				 * is available for the current engine. */
+    int nbWidgetSpecs;		/* Size of the array below. Number of distinct
+				 * widget classes (actually, distinct option
 				 * tables) that used the element so far. */
-    StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecs;	
+    StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecs;
 				/* See above for the structure definition.
-				 * Table grows dynamically as new widgets
-				 * use the element. Malloc'd. */
+				 * Table grows dynamically as new widgets use
+				 * the element. Malloc'd. */
 } StyledElement;
 
 /*
- * The following structure holds information behind Tk_StyleEngine opaque 
+ * The following structure holds information behind Tk_StyleEngine opaque
  * tokens.
  */
 
 typedef struct StyleEngine {
     CONST char *name;		/* Name of engine. Points to a hash key. */
-    StyledElement *elements;	/* Table of widget element descriptors. Each 
-				 * element is indexed by a unique system-wide 
-				 * ID. Table grows dynamically as new elements 
+    StyledElement *elements;	/* Table of widget element descriptors. Each
+				 * element is indexed by a unique system-wide
+				 * ID. Table grows dynamically as new elements
 				 * are registered. Malloc'd*/
-    struct StyleEngine *parentPtr;	
-				/* Parent engine. Engines may be layered to form
-				 * a fallback chain, terminated by the default 
-				 * system engine. */
+    struct StyleEngine *parentPtr;
+				/* Parent engine. Engines may be layered to
+				 * form a fallback chain, terminated by the
+				 * default system engine. */
 } StyleEngine;
 
 /*
- * Styles are instances of style engines. The following structure holds 
+ * Styles are instances of style engines. The following structure holds
  * information behind Tk_Style opaque tokens.
  */
 
 typedef struct Style {
     CONST char *name;		/* Name of style. Points to a hash key. */
-    StyleEngine *enginePtr;	/* Style engine of which the style is an 
+    StyleEngine *enginePtr;	/* Style engine of which the style is an
 				 * instance. */
     ClientData clientData;	/* Data provided during registration. */
 } Style;
 
 /*
- * Each registered element uses an instance of the following structure. 
+ * Each registered element uses an instance of the following structure.
  */
 
 typedef struct Element {
     CONST char *name;		/* Name of element. Points to a hash key. */
     int id;			/* Id of element. */
     int genericId;		/* Id of generic element. */
-    int created;		/* Boolean, whether the element was created 
-				 * explicitly (was registered) or implicitly 
+    int created;		/* Boolean, whether the element was created
+				 * explicitly (was registered) or implicitly
 				 * (by a derived element). */
 } Element;
 
@@ -102,65 +102,54 @@ typedef struct Element {
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
     int nbInit;			/* Number of calls to the init proc. */
-    Tcl_HashTable engineTable;	/* Map a name to a style engine. Keys are 
-				 * strings, values are Tk_StyleEngine 
+    Tcl_HashTable engineTable;	/* Map a name to a style engine. Keys are
+				 * strings, values are Tk_StyleEngine
 				 * pointers. */
-    StyleEngine *defaultEnginePtr;	
-				/* Default, core-defined style engine. Global 
+    StyleEngine *defaultEnginePtr;
+				/* Default, core-defined style engine. Global
 				 * fallback for all engines. */
-    Tcl_HashTable styleTable;	/* Map a name to a style. Keys are strings, 
+    Tcl_HashTable styleTable;	/* Map a name to a style. Keys are strings,
 				 * values are Tk_Style pointers.*/
     int nbElements;		/* Size of the below tables. */
-    Tcl_HashTable elementTable;	/* Map a name to an element Id. Keys are 
+    Tcl_HashTable elementTable;	/* Map a name to an element Id. Keys are
 				 * strings, values are integer element IDs. */
-    Element *elements;		/* Array of Elements. */				
+    Element *elements;		/* Array of Elements. */
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-/* TODO: sort alpha. */
-static int		CreateElement _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *name,
-			    int create));
-static void		DupStyleObjProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr));
-static void		FreeElement _ANSI_ARGS_((Element *elementPtr));
-static void		FreeStyledElement _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    StyledElement *elementPtr));
-static void		FreeStyleEngine _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    StyleEngine *enginePtr));
-static void		FreeStyleObjProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static void		FreeWidgetSpec _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr));
-static StyledElement *	GetStyledElement _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    StyleEngine *enginePtr, int elementId));
-static StyledWidgetSpec * GetWidgetSpec _ANSI_ARGS_((StyledElement *elementPtr,
-			    Tk_OptionTable optionTable));
-static void		InitElement _ANSI_ARGS_((Element *elementPtr, 
-			    CONST char *name, int id, int genericId, 
-			    int created));
-static void		InitStyle _ANSI_ARGS_((Style *stylePtr, 
-			    CONST char *name, 
-			    StyleEngine *enginePtr, ClientData clientData));
-static void		InitStyledElement _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    StyledElement *elementPtr));
-static void		InitStyleEngine _ANSI_ARGS_((StyleEngine *enginePtr,
-			    CONST char *name, StyleEngine *parentPtr));
-static void		InitWidgetSpec _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr, 
-			    StyledElement *elementPtr, 
-			    Tk_OptionTable optionTable));
-static int		SetStyleFromAny _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+static int		CreateElement(CONST char *name, int create);
+static void		DupStyleObjProc(Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr);
+static void		FreeElement(Element *elementPtr);
+static void		FreeStyledElement(StyledElement *elementPtr);
+static void		FreeStyleEngine(StyleEngine *enginePtr);
+static void		FreeStyleObjProc(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static void		FreeWidgetSpec(StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr);
+static StyledElement *	GetStyledElement(StyleEngine *enginePtr,
+			    int elementId);
+static StyledWidgetSpec*GetWidgetSpec(StyledElement *elementPtr,
+			    Tk_OptionTable optionTable);
+static void		InitElement(Element *elementPtr, CONST char *name,
+			    int id, int genericId, int created);
+static void		InitStyle(Style *stylePtr, CONST char *name,
+			    StyleEngine *enginePtr, ClientData clientData);
+static void		InitStyledElement(StyledElement *elementPtr);
+static void		InitStyleEngine(StyleEngine *enginePtr,
+			    CONST char *name, StyleEngine *parentPtr);
+static void		InitWidgetSpec(StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr,
+			    StyledElement *elementPtr,
+			    Tk_OptionTable optionTable);
+static int		SetStyleFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
 
 /*
  * The following structure defines the implementation of the "style" Tcl
- * object, used for drawing. The internalRep.otherValuePtr field of
- * each style object points to the Style structure for the stylefont, or
- * NULL.
+ * object, used for drawing. The internalRep.otherValuePtr field of each style
+ * object points to the Style structure for the stylefont, or NULL.
  */
 
 static Tcl_ObjType styleObjType = {
@@ -176,9 +165,9 @@ static Tcl_ObjType styleObjType = {
  *
  * TkStylePkgInit --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an application is created.  It
- *	initializes all the structures that are used by the style
- *	package on a per application basis.
+ *	This function is called when an application is created. It initializes
+ *	all the structures that are used by the style package on a per
+ *	application basis.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Stores data in thread-local storage.
@@ -190,13 +179,15 @@ static Tcl_ObjType styleObjType = {
  */
 
 void
-TkStylePkgInit(mainPtr)
-    TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* The application being created. */
+TkStylePkgInit(
+    TkMainInfo *mainPtr)	/* The application being created. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
-    if (tsdPtr->nbInit != 0) return;
+    if (tsdPtr->nbInit != 0) {
+	return;
+    }
 
     /*
      * Initialize tables.
@@ -211,15 +202,15 @@ TkStylePkgInit(mainPtr)
     /*
      * Create the default system engine.
      */
-    
-    tsdPtr->defaultEnginePtr = 
-	    (StyleEngine *) Tk_RegisterStyleEngine(NULL, NULL);
+
+    tsdPtr->defaultEnginePtr = (StyleEngine *)
+	    Tk_RegisterStyleEngine(NULL, NULL);
 
     /*
      * Create the default system style.
      */
 
-    Tk_CreateStyle(NULL, (Tk_StyleEngine) tsdPtr->defaultEnginePtr, 
+    Tk_CreateStyle(NULL, (Tk_StyleEngine) tsdPtr->defaultEnginePtr,
 	    (ClientData) 0);
 
     tsdPtr->nbInit++;
@@ -230,9 +221,9 @@ TkStylePkgInit(mainPtr)
  *
  * TkStylePkgFree --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an application is deleted.  It
- *	deletes all the structures that were used by the style package
- *	for this application.
+ *	This function is called when an application is deleted. It deletes all
+ *	the structures that were used by the style package for this
+ *	application.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -244,18 +235,20 @@ TkStylePkgInit(mainPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkStylePkgFree(mainPtr)
-    TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* The application being deleted. */
+TkStylePkgFree(
+    TkMainInfo *mainPtr)	/* The application being deleted. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     Tcl_HashSearch search;
     Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
     StyleEngine *enginePtr;
     int i;
 
     tsdPtr->nbInit--;
-    if (tsdPtr->nbInit != 0) return;
+    if (tsdPtr->nbInit != 0) {
+	return;
+    }
 
     /*
      * Free styles.
@@ -297,11 +290,12 @@ TkStylePkgFree(mainPtr)
  *
  * Tk_RegisterStyleEngine --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to register a new style engine. Style engines
+ *	This function is called to register a new style engine. Style engines
  *	are stored in thread-local space.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The newly allocated engine.
+ *	The newly allocated engine, or NULL if an engine with the same name
+ *	exists.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Memory allocated. Data added to thread-local table.
@@ -310,24 +304,24 @@ TkStylePkgFree(mainPtr)
  */
 
 Tk_StyleEngine
-Tk_RegisterStyleEngine(name, parent)
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of the engine to create. NULL or empty
+Tk_RegisterStyleEngine(
+    CONST char *name,		/* Name of the engine to create. NULL or empty
 				 * means the default system engine. */
-    Tk_StyleEngine parent;	/* The engine's parent. NULL means the default 
+    Tk_StyleEngine parent)	/* The engine's parent. NULL means the default
 				 * system engine. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
     int newEntry;
     StyleEngine *enginePtr;
 
     /*
-     * Attempt to create a new entry in the engine table. 
+     * Attempt to create a new entry in the engine table.
      */
 
-    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tsdPtr->engineTable, (name?name:""), 
-	    &newEntry);
+    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tsdPtr->engineTable,
+	    (name != NULL ? name : ""), &newEntry);
     if (!newEntry) {
 	/*
 	 * An engine was already registered by that name.
@@ -365,16 +359,16 @@ Tk_RegisterStyleEngine(name, parent)
  */
 
 static void
-InitStyleEngine(enginePtr, name, parentPtr)
-    StyleEngine *enginePtr;	/* Points to an uninitialized engine. */
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of the registered engine. NULL or empty
+InitStyleEngine(
+    StyleEngine *enginePtr,	/* Points to an uninitialized engine. */
+    CONST char *name,		/* Name of the registered engine. NULL or empty
 				 * means the default system engine. Usually
 				 * points to the hash key. */
-    StyleEngine *parentPtr;	/* The engine's parent. NULL means the default 
+    StyleEngine *parentPtr)	/* The engine's parent. NULL means the default
 				 * system engine. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     int elementId;
 
     if (name == NULL || *name == '\0') {
@@ -395,8 +389,8 @@ InitStyleEngine(enginePtr, name, parentPtr)
 	enginePtr->parentPtr = parentPtr;
     }
 
-    /* 
-     * Allocate and initialize elements array. 
+    /*
+     * Allocate and initialize elements array.
      */
 
     if (tsdPtr->nbElements > 0) {
@@ -427,11 +421,11 @@ InitStyleEngine(enginePtr, name, parentPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-FreeStyleEngine(enginePtr)
-    StyleEngine *enginePtr;	/* The style engine to free. */
+FreeStyleEngine(
+    StyleEngine *enginePtr)	/* The style engine to free. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     int elementId;
 
     /*
@@ -461,19 +455,19 @@ FreeStyleEngine(enginePtr)
  */
 
 Tk_StyleEngine
-Tk_GetStyleEngine(name)
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of the engine to retrieve. NULL or
+Tk_GetStyleEngine(
+    CONST char *name)		/* Name of the engine to retrieve. NULL or
 				 * empty means the default system engine. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
 
     if (name == NULL) {
 	return (Tk_StyleEngine) tsdPtr->defaultEnginePtr;
     }
 
-    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->engineTable, (name?name:""));
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->engineTable, (name!=NULL?name:""));
     if (!entryPtr) {
 	return NULL;
     }
@@ -498,14 +492,14 @@ Tk_GetStyleEngine(name)
  */
 
 static void
-InitElement(elementPtr, name, id, genericId, created)
-    Element *elementPtr;	/* Points to an uninitialized element.*/
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of the registered element. Usually
+InitElement(
+    Element *elementPtr,	/* Points to an uninitialized element.*/
+    CONST char *name,		/* Name of the registered element. Usually
 				 * points to the hash key. */
-    int id;			/* Unique element ID. */
-    int genericId;		/* ID of generic element. -1 means none. */
-    int created;		/* Boolean, whether the element was created 
-				 * explicitly (was registered) or implicitly 
+    int id,			/* Unique element ID. */
+    int genericId,		/* ID of generic element. -1 means none. */
+    int created)		/* Boolean, whether the element was created
+				 * explicitly (was registered) or implicitly
 				 * (by a derived element). */
 {
     elementPtr->name = name;
@@ -531,8 +525,8 @@ InitElement(elementPtr, name, id, genericId, created)
  */
 
 static void
-FreeElement(elementPtr)
-    Element *elementPtr;	/* The element to free. */
+FreeElement(
+    Element *elementPtr)	/* The element to free. */
 {
     /* Nothing to do. */
 }
@@ -554,8 +548,8 @@ FreeElement(elementPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-InitStyledElement(elementPtr)
-    StyledElement *elementPtr;	/* Points to an uninitialized element.*/
+InitStyledElement(
+    StyledElement *elementPtr)	/* Points to an uninitialized element.*/
 {
     memset(elementPtr, 0, sizeof(StyledElement));
 }
@@ -577,8 +571,8 @@ InitStyledElement(elementPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-FreeStyledElement(elementPtr)
-    StyledElement *elementPtr;	/* The styled element to free. */
+FreeStyledElement(
+    StyledElement *elementPtr)	/* The styled element to free. */
 {
     int i;
 
@@ -609,14 +603,14 @@ FreeStyledElement(elementPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-CreateElement(name, create)
-    CONST char *name;	/* Name of the element. */
-    int create;		/* Boolean, whether the element is being created 
-			 * explicitly (being registered) or implicitly (by a 
+CreateElement(
+    CONST char *name,	/* Name of the element. */
+    int create)		/* Boolean, whether the element is being created
+			 * explicitly (being registered) or implicitly (by a
 			 * derived element). */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr, *engineEntryPtr;
     Tcl_HashSearch search;
     int newEntry;
@@ -638,8 +632,8 @@ CreateElement(name, create)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The element didn't exist. If it's a derived element, find or
-     * create its generic element ID.
+     * The element didn't exist. If it's a derived element, find or create its
+     * generic element ID.
      */
 
     dot = strchr(name, '.');
@@ -654,9 +648,9 @@ CreateElement(name, create)
      * Reallocate element table.
      */
 
-    tsdPtr->elements = (Element *) ckrealloc((char *) tsdPtr->elements, 
+    tsdPtr->elements = (Element *) ckrealloc((char *) tsdPtr->elements,
 	    sizeof(Element) * tsdPtr->nbElements);
-    InitElement(tsdPtr->elements+elementId, 
+    InitElement(tsdPtr->elements+elementId,
 	    Tcl_GetHashKey(&tsdPtr->elementTable, entryPtr), elementId,
 	    genericId, create);
 
@@ -669,7 +663,7 @@ CreateElement(name, create)
 	enginePtr = (StyleEngine *) Tcl_GetHashValue(engineEntryPtr);
 
 	enginePtr->elements = (StyledElement *) ckrealloc(
-		(char *) enginePtr->elements, 
+		(char *) enginePtr->elements,
 		sizeof(StyledElement) * tsdPtr->nbElements);
 	InitStyledElement(enginePtr->elements+elementId);
 
@@ -696,11 +690,11 @@ CreateElement(name, create)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_GetElementId(name)
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of the element. */
+Tk_GetElementId(
+    CONST char *name)		/* Name of the element. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
     int genericId = -1;
     char *dot;
@@ -715,7 +709,7 @@ Tk_GetElementId(name)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Element not found. If the given name was derived, then first search for 
+     * Element not found. If the given name was derived, then first search for
      * the generic element. If found, create the new derived element.
      */
 
@@ -728,7 +722,7 @@ Tk_GetElementId(name)
 	return -1;
     }
     if (!tsdPtr->elements[genericId].created) {
-	/* 
+	/*
 	 * The generic element was created implicitly and thus has no real
 	 * existence.
 	 */
@@ -749,8 +743,8 @@ Tk_GetElementId(name)
  *
  * Tk_RegisterStyledElement --
  *
- *	Register an implementation of a new or existing element for the
- *	given style engine.
+ *	Register an implementation of a new or existing element for the given
+ *	style engine.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The unique ID for the created or found element.
@@ -762,11 +756,11 @@ Tk_GetElementId(name)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_RegisterStyledElement(engine, templatePtr)
-    Tk_StyleEngine engine;		/* Style engine providing the
-					 * implementation. */
-    Tk_ElementSpec *templatePtr;	/* Static template information about
-					 * the element. */
+Tk_RegisterStyledElement(
+    Tk_StyleEngine engine,	/* Style engine providing the
+				 * implementation. */
+    Tk_ElementSpec *templatePtr)/* Static template information about the
+				 * element. */
 {
     int elementId;
     StyledElement *elementPtr;
@@ -787,7 +781,7 @@ Tk_RegisterStyledElement(engine, templatePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Register the element, allocating storage in the various engines if 
+     * Register the element, allocating storage in the various engines if
      * necessary.
      */
 
@@ -805,13 +799,13 @@ Tk_RegisterStyledElement(engine, templatePtr)
     strcpy(specPtr->name, templatePtr->name);
     nbOptions = 0;
     for (nbOptions = 0, srcOptions = templatePtr->options;
-	 srcOptions->name != NULL;
-	 nbOptions++, srcOptions++);
-    specPtr->options = (Tk_ElementOptionSpec *) ckalloc(
-	    sizeof(Tk_ElementOptionSpec) * (nbOptions+1));
+	    srcOptions->name != NULL; nbOptions++, srcOptions++) {
+	/* empty body */
+    }
+    specPtr->options = (Tk_ElementOptionSpec *)
+	    ckalloc(sizeof(Tk_ElementOptionSpec) * (nbOptions+1));
     for (srcOptions = templatePtr->options, dstOptions = specPtr->options;
-	 /* End condition within loop */;
-	 srcOptions++, dstOptions++) {
+	    /* End condition within loop */; srcOptions++, dstOptions++) {
 	if (srcOptions->name == NULL) {
 	    dstOptions->name = NULL;
 	    break;
@@ -838,8 +832,8 @@ Tk_RegisterStyledElement(engine, templatePtr)
  *
  * GetStyledElement --
  *
- *	Get a registered implementation of an existing element for the
- *	given style engine.
+ *	Get a registered implementation of an existing element for the given
+ *	style engine.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The styled element descriptor, or NULL if not found.
@@ -851,12 +845,13 @@ Tk_RegisterStyledElement(engine, templatePtr)
  */
 
 static StyledElement *
-GetStyledElement(enginePtr, elementId)
-    StyleEngine *enginePtr;	/* Style engine providing the implementation. 
+GetStyledElement(
+    StyleEngine *enginePtr,	/* Style engine providing the implementation.
 				 * NULL means the default system engine. */
-    int elementId;		/* Unique element ID */{
+    int elementId)		/* Unique element ID */
+{
     StyledElement *elementPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
 	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     StyleEngine *enginePtr2;
 
@@ -909,11 +904,11 @@ GetStyledElement(enginePtr, elementId)
  */
 
 static void
-InitWidgetSpec(widgetSpecPtr, elementPtr, optionTable)
-    StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr;	/* Points to an uninitialized widget
-					 * spec. */
-    StyledElement *elementPtr;		/* Styled element descriptor. */
-    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;		/* The widget's option table. */
+InitWidgetSpec(
+    StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr,
+				/* Points to an uninitialized widget spec. */
+    StyledElement *elementPtr,	/* Styled element descriptor. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable)	/* The widget's option table. */
 {
     int i, nbOptions;
     Tk_ElementOptionSpec *elementOptionPtr;
@@ -921,33 +916,32 @@ InitWidgetSpec(widgetSpecPtr, elementPtr, optionTable)
 
     widgetSpecPtr->elementPtr = elementPtr;
     widgetSpecPtr->optionTable = optionTable;
-    
+
     /*
      * Count the number of options.
      */
 
-    for (nbOptions = 0, elementOptionPtr = elementPtr->specPtr->options; 
-	    elementOptionPtr->name != NULL;
-	    nbOptions++, elementOptionPtr++) {
+    for (nbOptions = 0, elementOptionPtr = elementPtr->specPtr->options;
+	    elementOptionPtr->name != NULL; nbOptions++, elementOptionPtr++) {
+	/* empty body */
     }
 
     /*
      * Build the widget option list.
      */
 
-    widgetSpecPtr->optionsPtr = (CONST Tk_OptionSpec **) ckalloc(
-	    sizeof(Tk_OptionSpec *) * nbOptions);
-    for (i = 0, elementOptionPtr = elementPtr->specPtr->options; 
-	    i < nbOptions;
-	    i++, elementOptionPtr++) {
+    widgetSpecPtr->optionsPtr = (CONST Tk_OptionSpec **)
+	    ckalloc(sizeof(Tk_OptionSpec *) * nbOptions);
+    for (i = 0, elementOptionPtr = elementPtr->specPtr->options;
+	    i < nbOptions; i++, elementOptionPtr++) {
 	widgetOptionPtr = TkGetOptionSpec(elementOptionPtr->name, optionTable);
 
 	/*
-	 * Check that the widget option type is compatible with one of the 
+	 * Check that the widget option type is compatible with one of the
 	 * element's required types.
 	 */
 
-	if (   elementOptionPtr->type == TK_OPTION_END
+	if (elementOptionPtr->type == TK_OPTION_END
 	    || elementOptionPtr->type == widgetOptionPtr->type) {
 	    widgetSpecPtr->optionsPtr[i] = widgetOptionPtr;
 	} else {
@@ -973,8 +967,9 @@ InitWidgetSpec(widgetSpecPtr, elementPtr, optionTable)
  */
 
 static void
-FreeWidgetSpec(widgetSpecPtr)
-    StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr;	/* The widget spec to free. */
+FreeWidgetSpec(
+    StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr)
+				/* The widget spec to free. */
 {
     ckfree((char *) widgetSpecPtr->optionsPtr);
 }
@@ -984,8 +979,8 @@ FreeWidgetSpec(widgetSpecPtr)
  *
  * GetWidgetSpec --
  *
- *	Return a new or existing widget spec for the given element and
- *	widget type (identified by its option table).
+ *	Return a new or existing widget spec for the given element and widget
+ *	type (identified by its option table).
  *
  * Results:
  *	A pointer to the matching widget spec.
@@ -997,9 +992,9 @@ FreeWidgetSpec(widgetSpecPtr)
  */
 
 static StyledWidgetSpec *
-GetWidgetSpec(elementPtr, optionTable)
-    StyledElement *elementPtr;		/* Styled element descriptor. */
-    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;		/* The widget's option table. */
+GetWidgetSpec(
+    StyledElement *elementPtr,	/* Styled element descriptor. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable)	/* The widget's option table. */
 {
     StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr;
     int i;
@@ -1021,7 +1016,7 @@ GetWidgetSpec(elementPtr, optionTable)
 
     i = elementPtr->nbWidgetSpecs++;
     elementPtr->widgetSpecs = (StyledWidgetSpec *) ckrealloc(
-	    (char *) elementPtr->widgetSpecs, 
+	    (char *) elementPtr->widgetSpecs,
 	    sizeof(StyledWidgetSpec) * elementPtr->nbWidgetSpecs);
     widgetSpecPtr = elementPtr->widgetSpecs+i;
     InitWidgetSpec(widgetSpecPtr, elementPtr, optionTable);
@@ -1034,7 +1029,7 @@ GetWidgetSpec(elementPtr, optionTable)
  *
  * Tk_GetStyledElement --
  *
- *	This procedure returns a styled instance of the given element.
+ *	This function returns a styled instance of the given element.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1046,10 +1041,10 @@ GetWidgetSpec(elementPtr, optionTable)
  */
 
 Tk_StyledElement
-Tk_GetStyledElement(style, elementId, optionTable)
-    Tk_Style style;		/* The widget style. */
-    int elementId;		/* Unique element ID. */
-    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Option table for the widget. */
+Tk_GetStyledElement(
+    Tk_Style style,		/* The widget style. */
+    int elementId,		/* Unique element ID. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable)	/* Option table for the widget. */
 {
     Style *stylePtr = (Style *) style;
     StyledElement *elementPtr;
@@ -1058,7 +1053,7 @@ Tk_GetStyledElement(style, elementId, optionTable)
      * Get an element implementation and call corresponding hook.
      */
 
-    elementPtr = GetStyledElement((stylePtr?stylePtr->enginePtr:NULL), 
+    elementPtr = GetStyledElement((stylePtr?stylePtr->enginePtr:NULL),
 	    elementId);
     if (!elementPtr) {
 	return NULL;
@@ -1072,7 +1067,7 @@ Tk_GetStyledElement(style, elementId, optionTable)
  *
  * Tk_GetElementSize --
  *
- *	This procedure computes the size of the given widget element according
+ *	This function computes the size of the given widget element according
  *	to its style.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -1085,26 +1080,25 @@ Tk_GetStyledElement(style, elementId, optionTable)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_GetElementSize(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin, width, height, inner, widthPtr, 
-	heightPtr)
-    Tk_Style style;			/* The widget style. */
-    Tk_StyledElement element;		/* The styled element, previously
-					 * returned by Tk_GetStyledElement. */
-    char *recordPtr;			/* The widget record. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* The widget window. */
-    int width, height;			/* Requested size. */
-    int inner;				/* Boolean. If TRUE, compute the outer
-					 * size according to the requested
-					 * minimum inner size. If FALSE, compute
-					 * the inner size according to the 
-					 * requested maximum outer size. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;		/* Returned size. */
+Tk_GetElementSize(
+    Tk_Style style,		/* The widget style. */
+    Tk_StyledElement element,	/* The styled element, previously returned by
+				 * Tk_GetStyledElement. */
+    char *recordPtr,		/* The widget record. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The widget window. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Requested size. */
+    int inner,			/* If TRUE, compute the outer size according
+				 * to the requested minimum inner size. If
+				 * FALSE, compute the inner size according to
+				 * the requested maximum outer size. */
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+				/* Returned size. */
 {
     Style *stylePtr = (Style *) style;
     StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr = (StyledWidgetSpec *) element;
 
-    widgetSpecPtr->elementPtr->specPtr->getSize(stylePtr->clientData, 
-	    recordPtr, widgetSpecPtr->optionsPtr, tkwin, width, height, inner, 
+    widgetSpecPtr->elementPtr->specPtr->getSize(stylePtr->clientData,
+	    recordPtr, widgetSpecPtr->optionsPtr, tkwin, width, height, inner,
 	    widthPtr, heightPtr);
 }
 
@@ -1113,9 +1107,9 @@ Tk_GetElementSize(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin, width, height, inner, widthP
  *
  * Tk_GetElementBox --
  *
- *	This procedure computes the bounding or inscribed box coordinates
- *	of the given widget element according to its style and within the
- *	given limits.
+ *	This function computes the bounding or inscribed box coordinates of
+ *	the given widget element according to its style and within the given
+ *	limits.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1127,29 +1121,27 @@ Tk_GetElementSize(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin, width, height, inner, widthP
  */
 
 void
-Tk_GetElementBox(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin, x, y, width, height, inner, 
-	xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
-    Tk_Style style;			/* The widget style. */
-    Tk_StyledElement element;		/* The styled element, previously
-					 * returned by Tk_GetStyledElement. */
-    char *recordPtr;			/* The widget record. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* The widget window. */
-    int x, y;				/* Top left corner of available area. */
-    int width, height;			/* Size of available area. */
-    int inner;				/* Boolean. If TRUE, compute the 
-					 * bounding box according to the 
-					 * requested inscribed box size. If 
-					 * FALSE, compute the inscribed box 
-					 * according to the requested bounding
-					 * box. */
-    int *xPtr, *yPtr;			/* Returned top left corner. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;		/* Returned size. */
+Tk_GetElementBox(
+    Tk_Style style,		/* The widget style. */
+    Tk_StyledElement element,	/* The styled element, previously returned by
+				 * Tk_GetStyledElement. */
+    char *recordPtr,		/* The widget record. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The widget window. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Top left corner of available area. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Size of available area. */
+    int inner,			/* Boolean. If TRUE, compute the bounding box
+				 * according to the requested inscribed box
+				 * size. If FALSE, compute the inscribed box
+				 * according to the requested bounding box. */
+    int *xPtr, int *yPtr,	/* Returned top left corner. */
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+				/* Returned size. */
 {
     Style *stylePtr = (Style *) style;
     StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr = (StyledWidgetSpec *) element;
 
-    widgetSpecPtr->elementPtr->specPtr->getBox(stylePtr->clientData, 
-	    recordPtr, widgetSpecPtr->optionsPtr, tkwin, x, y, width, height, 
+    widgetSpecPtr->elementPtr->specPtr->getBox(stylePtr->clientData,
+	    recordPtr, widgetSpecPtr->optionsPtr, tkwin, x, y, width, height,
 	    inner, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr);
 }
 
@@ -1158,7 +1150,7 @@ Tk_GetElementBox(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin, x, y, width, height, inner,
  *
  * Tk_GetElementBorderWidth --
  *
- *	This procedure computes the border widthof the given widget element 
+ *	This function computes the border widthof the given widget element
  *	according to its style and within the given limits.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -1171,12 +1163,12 @@ Tk_GetElementBox(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin, x, y, width, height, inner,
  */
 
 int
-Tk_GetElementBorderWidth(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin)
-    Tk_Style style;			/* The widget style. */
-    Tk_StyledElement element;		/* The styled element, previously
-					 * returned by Tk_GetStyledElement. */
-    char *recordPtr;			/* The widget record. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* The widget window. */
+Tk_GetElementBorderWidth(
+    Tk_Style style,		/* The widget style. */
+    Tk_StyledElement element,	/* The styled element, previously returned by
+				 * Tk_GetStyledElement. */
+    char *recordPtr,		/* The widget record. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* The widget window. */
 {
     Style *stylePtr = (Style *) style;
     StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr = (StyledWidgetSpec *) element;
@@ -1190,7 +1182,7 @@ Tk_GetElementBorderWidth(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin)
  *
  * Tk_DrawElement --
  *
- *	This procedure draw the given widget element in a given drawable area.
+ *	This function draw the given widget element in a given drawable area.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None
@@ -1202,22 +1194,22 @@ Tk_GetElementBorderWidth(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_DrawElement(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin, d, x, y, width, height, state)
-    Tk_Style style;			/* The widget style. */
-    Tk_StyledElement element;		/* The styled element, previously
-					 * returned by Tk_GetStyledElement. */
-    char *recordPtr;			/* The widget record. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* The widget window. */
-    Drawable d;				/* Where to draw element. */
-    int x, y;				/* Top left corner of element. */
-    int width, height;			/* Size of element. */
-    int state;				/* Drawing state flags. */
+Tk_DrawElement(
+    Tk_Style style,		/* The widget style. */
+    Tk_StyledElement element,	/* The styled element, previously returned by
+				 * Tk_GetStyledElement. */
+    char *recordPtr,		/* The widget record. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The widget window. */
+    Drawable d,			/* Where to draw element. */
+    int x, int y,		/* Top left corner of element. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Size of element. */
+    int state)			/* Drawing state flags. */
 {
     Style *stylePtr = (Style *) style;
     StyledWidgetSpec *widgetSpecPtr = (StyledWidgetSpec *) element;
 
-    widgetSpecPtr->elementPtr->specPtr->draw(stylePtr->clientData, 
-	    recordPtr, widgetSpecPtr->optionsPtr, tkwin, d, x, y, width, 
+    widgetSpecPtr->elementPtr->specPtr->draw(stylePtr->clientData,
+	    recordPtr, widgetSpecPtr->optionsPtr, tkwin, d, x, y, width,
 	    height, state);
 }
 
@@ -1226,11 +1218,11 @@ Tk_DrawElement(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin, d, x, y, width, height, state)
  *
  * Tk_CreateStyle --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to create a new style as an instance of the
+ *	This function is called to create a new style as an instance of the
  *	given engine. Styles are stored in thread-local space.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The newly allocated style.
+ *	The newly allocated style, or NULL if the style already exists.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Memory allocated. Data added to thread-local table.
@@ -1239,23 +1231,23 @@ Tk_DrawElement(style, element, recordPtr, tkwin, d, x, y, width, height, state)
  */
 
 Tk_Style
-Tk_CreateStyle(name, engine, clientData)
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of the style to create. NULL or empty
+Tk_CreateStyle(
+    CONST char *name,		/* Name of the style to create. NULL or empty
 				 * means the default system style. */
-    Tk_StyleEngine engine;	/* The style engine. */
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Private data passed as is to engine code. */
+    Tk_StyleEngine engine,	/* The style engine. */
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Private data passed as is to engine code. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
     int newEntry;
     Style *stylePtr;
 
     /*
-     * Attempt to create a new entry in the style table. 
+     * Attempt to create a new entry in the style table.
      */
 
-    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tsdPtr->styleTable, (name?name:""), 
+    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tsdPtr->styleTable, (name?name:""),
 	    &newEntry);
     if (!newEntry) {
 	/*
@@ -1271,7 +1263,9 @@ Tk_CreateStyle(name, engine, clientData)
 
     stylePtr = (Style *) ckalloc(sizeof(Style));
     InitStyle(stylePtr, Tcl_GetHashKey(&tsdPtr->styleTable, entryPtr),
-	    (engine?(StyleEngine *) engine:tsdPtr->defaultEnginePtr), clientData);
+	    (engine != NULL ? (StyleEngine *) engine :
+		    tsdPtr->defaultEnginePtr),
+	    clientData);
     Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, (ClientData) stylePtr);
 
     return (Tk_Style) stylePtr;
@@ -1285,9 +1279,9 @@ Tk_CreateStyle(name, engine, clientData)
  *	Given a style, return its registered name.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the name that was passed to Tk_CreateStyle() to 
- *	create the style.  The storage for the returned string is private
- *	(it points to the corresponding hash key) The caller should not modify 
+ *	The return value is the name that was passed to Tk_CreateStyle() to
+ *	create the style. The storage for the returned string is private (it
+ *	points to the corresponding hash key) The caller should not modify
  *	this string.
  *
  * Side effects:
@@ -1297,8 +1291,8 @@ Tk_CreateStyle(name, engine, clientData)
  */
 
 CONST char *
-Tk_NameOfStyle(style)
-    Tk_Style style;		/* Style whose name is desired. */
+Tk_NameOfStyle(
+    Tk_Style style)		/* Style whose name is desired. */
 {
     Style *stylePtr = (Style *) style;
 
@@ -1322,13 +1316,13 @@ Tk_NameOfStyle(style)
  */
 
 static void
-InitStyle(stylePtr, name, enginePtr, clientData)
-    Style *stylePtr;		/* Points to an uninitialized style. */
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of the registered style. NULL or empty
+InitStyle(
+    Style *stylePtr,		/* Points to an uninitialized style. */
+    CONST char *name,		/* Name of the registered style. NULL or empty
 				 * means the default system style. Usually
 				 * points to the hash key. */
-    StyleEngine *enginePtr;	/* The style engine. */
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Private data passed as is to engine code. */
+    StyleEngine *enginePtr,	/* The style engine. */
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Private data passed as is to engine code. */
 {
     stylePtr->name = name;
     stylePtr->enginePtr = enginePtr;
@@ -1343,8 +1337,8 @@ InitStyle(stylePtr, name, enginePtr, clientData)
  *	Retrieve a registered style by its name.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A pointer to the style engine, or NULL if none found.  In the latter
- *	case and if the interp is not NULL, an error message is left in the 
+ *	A pointer to the style engine, or NULL if none found. In the latter
+ *	case and if the interp is not NULL, an error message is left in the
  *	interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
@@ -1354,24 +1348,25 @@ InitStyle(stylePtr, name, enginePtr, clientData)
  */
 
 Tk_Style
-Tk_GetStyle(interp, name)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp for error return. */
-    CONST char *name;		/* Name of the style to retrieve. NULL or empty
+Tk_GetStyle(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp for error return. */
+    CONST char *name)		/* Name of the style to retrieve. NULL or empty
 				 * means the default system style. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
     Style *stylePtr;
 
     /*
-     * Search for a corresponding entry in the style table. 
+     * Search for a corresponding entry in the style table.
      */
 
-    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->styleTable, (name?name:""));
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->styleTable, (name!=NULL?name:""));
     if (entryPtr == NULL) {
 	if (interp != NULL) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "style \"", name, "\" doesn't exist", NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "style \"", name, "\" doesn't exist",
+		    NULL);
 	}
 	return (Tk_Style) NULL;
     }
@@ -1385,37 +1380,37 @@ Tk_GetStyle(interp, name)
  *
  * Tk_FreeStyle --
  *
- *	No-op.  Present only for stubs compatibility.
+ *	No-op. Present only for stubs compatibility.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-void 
-Tk_FreeStyle(style)
-    Tk_Style style;
+void
+Tk_FreeStyle(
+    Tk_Style style)
 {
 }
 
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * Tk_AllocStyleFromObj -- 
+ * Tk_AllocStyleFromObj --
  *
- *	Map the string name of a style to a corresponding Tk_Style. The style 
+ *	Map the string name of a style to a corresponding Tk_Style. The style
  *	must have already been created by Tk_CreateStyle.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for the style that matches objPtr, or 
- *	NULL if none found.  If NULL is returned, an error message will be 
- *	left in interp's result object.
+ *	The return value is a token for the style that matches objPtr, or NULL
+ *	if none found. If NULL is returned, an error message will be left in
+ *	interp's result object.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_Style
-Tk_AllocStyleFromObj(interp, objPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp for error return. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Object containing name of the style to
+Tk_AllocStyleFromObj(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp for error return. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* Object containing name of the style to
 				 * retrieve. */
 {
     Style *stylePtr;
@@ -1435,26 +1430,26 @@ Tk_AllocStyleFromObj(interp, objPtr)
  *
  * Tk_GetStyleFromObj --
  *
- *	Find the style that corresponds to a given object.  The style must
- *	have already been created by Tk_CreateStyle.
+ *	Find the style that corresponds to a given object. The style must have
+ *	already been created by Tk_CreateStyle.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for the style that matches objPtr, or 
- *	NULL if none found.
+ *	The return value is a token for the style that matches objPtr, or NULL
+ *	if none found.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the object is not already a style ref, the conversion will free
- *	any old internal representation. 
+ *	If the object is not already a style ref, the conversion will free any
+ *	old internal representation.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_Style
-Tk_GetStyleFromObj(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object from which to get the style. */
+Tk_GetStyleFromObj(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object from which to get the style. */
 {
     if (objPtr->typePtr != &styleObjType) {
-	SetStyleFromAny((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, objPtr);
+	SetStyleFromAny(NULL, objPtr);
     }
 
     return (Tk_Style) objPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr;
@@ -1463,15 +1458,15 @@ Tk_GetStyleFromObj(objPtr)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * Tk_FreeStyleFromObj -- 
+ * Tk_FreeStyleFromObj --
  *
- *	No-op.  Present only for stubs compatibility.
+ *	No-op. Present only for stubs compatibility.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 void
-Tk_FreeStyleFromObj(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+Tk_FreeStyleFromObj(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
 {
 }
 
@@ -1480,13 +1475,12 @@ Tk_FreeStyleFromObj(objPtr)
  *
  * SetStyleFromAny --
  *
- *	Convert the internal representation of a Tcl object to the
- *	style internal form.
+ *	Convert the internal representation of a Tcl object to the style
+ *	internal form.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Always returns TCL_OK.  If an error occurs is returned (e.g. the
- *	style doesn't exist), an error message will be left in interp's 
- *	result.
+ *	Always returns TCL_OK. If an error occurs is returned (e.g. the style
+ *	doesn't exist), an error message will be left in interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The object is left with its typePtr pointing to styleObjType.
@@ -1495,15 +1489,15 @@ Tk_FreeStyleFromObj(objPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-SetStyleFromAny(interp, objPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object to convert. */
+SetStyleFromAny(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object to convert. */
 {
     Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
     char *name;
 
     /*
-     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one. 
+     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one.
      */
 
     name = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
@@ -1521,10 +1515,10 @@ SetStyleFromAny(interp, objPtr)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * FreeStyleObjProc -- 
+ * FreeStyleObjProc --
  *
- *	This proc is called to release an object reference to a style.
- *	Called when the object's internal rep is released.
+ *	This proc is called to release an object reference to a style. Called
+ *	when the object's internal rep is released.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1533,8 +1527,8 @@ SetStyleFromAny(interp, objPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-FreeStyleObjProc(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object we are releasing. */
+FreeStyleObjProc(
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr)		/* The object we are releasing. */
 {
     objPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr = NULL;
     objPtr->typePtr = NULL;
@@ -1543,19 +1537,27 @@ FreeStyleObjProc(objPtr)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * DupStyleObjProc -- 
+ * DupStyleObjProc --
  *
- *	When a cached style object is duplicated, this is called to
- *	update the internal reps.
+ *	When a cached style object is duplicated, this is called to update the
+ *	internal reps.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-DupStyleObjProc(srcObjPtr, dupObjPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr;		/* The object we are copying from. */
-    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr;		/* The object we are copying to. */
+DupStyleObjProc(
+    Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr,		/* The object we are copying from. */
+    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr)		/* The object we are copying to. */
 {
     dupObjPtr->typePtr = srcObjPtr->typePtr;
     dupObjPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr=srcObjPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkUndo.h b/generic/tkUndo.h
index 3c34a0f..a8b053e 100644
--- a/generic/tkUndo.h
+++ b/generic/tkUndo.h
@@ -1,15 +1,14 @@
 /*
  * tkUndo.h --
  *
- *	Declarations shared among the files that implement an undo
- *	stack.
+ *	Declarations shared among the files that implement an undo stack.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 2002 Ludwig Callewaert.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkUndo.h,v 1.3 2004/09/10 12:13:42 vincentdarley Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkUndo.h,v 1.4 2005/11/15 15:18:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #ifndef _TKUNDO
@@ -24,104 +23,98 @@
 # define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT
 #endif
 
-/* Enum definining the types used in an undo stack */
+/*
+ * Enum definining the types used in an undo stack.
+ */
 
 typedef enum {
-    TK_UNDO_SEPARATOR,			/* Marker */
-    TK_UNDO_ACTION			/* Command */
+    TK_UNDO_SEPARATOR,		/* Marker */
+    TK_UNDO_ACTION		/* Command */
 } TkUndoAtomType;
 
-/* 
- * Callback proc type to carry out an undo or redo action
- * via C code.  (Actions can also be defined by Tcl scripts).
+/*
+ * Callback proc type to carry out an undo or redo action via C code. (Actions
+ * can also be defined by Tcl scripts).
  */
 
-typedef int (TkUndoProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, 
-				      ClientData clientData, 
-				      Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+typedef int (TkUndoProc)(Tcl_Interp *interp, ClientData clientData,
+			Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
 
-/* 
- * Struct defining a single action, one or more of which may
- * be defined (and stored in a linked list) separately for each 
- * undo and redo action of an undo atom.
+/*
+ * Struct defining a single action, one or more of which may be defined (and
+ * stored in a linked list) separately for each undo and redo action of an
+ * undo atom.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkUndoSubAtom {
-    Tcl_Command command;        /* Tcl token used to get the current
-				 * Tcl command name which will be used
-				 * to execute apply/revert scripts.  If 
-				 * NULL then it is assumed the
-				 * apply/revert scripts already contain
-				 * everything. */
-    TkUndoProc *funcPtr;        /* Function pointer for callback to
-				 * perform undo/redo actions. */
+    Tcl_Command command;	/* Tcl token used to get the current Tcl
+				 * command name which will be used to execute
+				 * apply/revert scripts. If NULL then it is
+				 * assumed the apply/revert scripts already
+				 * contain everything. */
+    TkUndoProc *funcPtr;        /* Function pointer for callback to perform
+				 * undo/redo actions. */
     ClientData clientData;      /* data for 'funcPtr' */
-    Tcl_Obj *action;		/* Command to apply the action that 
-				 * was taken */
-    struct TkUndoSubAtom *next; /* Pointer to the next element in the
-				 * linked list */
+    Tcl_Obj *action;		/* Command to apply the action that was
+				 * taken */
+    struct TkUndoSubAtom *next; /* Pointer to the next element in the linked
+				 * list */
 } TkUndoSubAtom;
 
-/* 
- * Struct representing a single undo+redo atom to be placed in
- * the stack.
+/*
+ * Struct representing a single undo+redo atom to be placed in the stack.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkUndoAtom {
-    TkUndoAtomType type;	/* The type that will trigger the
-				 * required action*/
-    TkUndoSubAtom *apply;       /* Linked list of 'apply' actions to
-                                 * perform for this operation */
-    TkUndoSubAtom *revert;      /* Linked list of 'revert' actions to
-                                 * perform for this operation */
-    struct TkUndoAtom *next;	/* Pointer to the next element in the
-				 * stack */
+    TkUndoAtomType type;	/* The type that will trigger the required
+				 * action. */
+    TkUndoSubAtom *apply;       /* Linked list of 'apply' actions to perform
+                                 * for this operation. */
+    TkUndoSubAtom *revert;      /* Linked list of 'revert' actions to perform
+                                 * for this operation. */
+    struct TkUndoAtom *next;	/* Pointer to the next element in the stack */
 } TkUndoAtom;
 
-/* 
+/*
  * Struct defining a single undo+redo stack.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkUndoRedoStack {
-    TkUndoAtom * undoStack;	  /* The undo stack */
-    TkUndoAtom * redoStack;	  /* The redo stack */
-    Tcl_Interp * interp   ;       /* The interpreter in which to execute 
-                                   * the revert and apply scripts */
-    int          maxdepth;
-    int          depth;
+    TkUndoAtom *undoStack;	/* The undo stack */
+    TkUndoAtom *redoStack;	/* The redo stack */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* The interpreter in which to execute the
+				 * revert and apply scripts */
+    int maxdepth;
+    int depth;
 } TkUndoRedoStack;
 
-/* Basic functions */
-
-EXTERN void TkUndoPushStack         _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoAtom **stack,
-						TkUndoAtom *elem));
-EXTERN TkUndoAtom * TkUndoPopStack  _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoAtom **stack));
-EXTERN int TkUndoInsertSeparator    _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoAtom **stack));
-EXTERN void TkUndoClearStack        _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoAtom **stack));
-
-/* Functions for working on an undo/redo stack */
-
-EXTERN TkUndoRedoStack * TkUndoInitStack    _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-						int maxdepth));
-EXTERN void TkUndoSetDepth                  _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoRedoStack *stack,
-						int maxdepth));
-EXTERN void TkUndoClearStacks               _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoRedoStack *stack));
-EXTERN void TkUndoFreeStack                 _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoRedoStack *stack));
-EXTERN void TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator       _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoRedoStack *stack));
-EXTERN TkUndoSubAtom * TkUndoMakeCmdSubAtom _ANSI_ARGS_((
-						 Tcl_Command command, 
-						 Tcl_Obj *actionScript, 
-						 TkUndoSubAtom *subAtomList));
-EXTERN TkUndoSubAtom * TkUndoMakeSubAtom    _ANSI_ARGS_((
-						 TkUndoProc *funcPtr, 
-						 ClientData clientData,
-						 Tcl_Obj *actionScript, 
-						 TkUndoSubAtom *subAtomList));
-EXTERN void TkUndoPushAction                _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoRedoStack *stack,
-						 TkUndoSubAtom *apply, 
-						 TkUndoSubAtom *revert));
-EXTERN int TkUndoRevert                     _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoRedoStack *stack));
-EXTERN int TkUndoApply                      _ANSI_ARGS_((TkUndoRedoStack *stack));
+/*
+ * Basic functions.
+ */
+
+EXTERN void		TkUndoPushStack(TkUndoAtom **stack, TkUndoAtom *elem);
+EXTERN TkUndoAtom *	TkUndoPopStack(TkUndoAtom **stack);
+EXTERN int		TkUndoInsertSeparator(TkUndoAtom **stack);
+EXTERN void		TkUndoClearStack(TkUndoAtom **stack);
+
+/*
+ * Functions for working on an undo/redo stack.
+ */
+
+EXTERN TkUndoRedoStack *TkUndoInitStack(Tcl_Interp *interp, int maxdepth);
+EXTERN void		TkUndoSetDepth(TkUndoRedoStack *stack, int maxdepth);
+EXTERN void		TkUndoClearStacks(TkUndoRedoStack *stack);
+EXTERN void		TkUndoFreeStack(TkUndoRedoStack *stack);
+EXTERN void		TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator(TkUndoRedoStack *stack);
+EXTERN TkUndoSubAtom *	TkUndoMakeCmdSubAtom(Tcl_Command command,
+			    Tcl_Obj *actionScript, TkUndoSubAtom *subAtomList);
+EXTERN TkUndoSubAtom *	TkUndoMakeSubAtom(TkUndoProc *funcPtr,
+			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Obj *actionScript,
+			    TkUndoSubAtom *subAtomList);
+EXTERN void		TkUndoPushAction(TkUndoRedoStack *stack,
+			    TkUndoSubAtom *apply, TkUndoSubAtom *revert);
+EXTERN int		TkUndoRevert(TkUndoRedoStack *stack);
+EXTERN int		TkUndoApply(TkUndoRedoStack *stack);
 
 # undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
 # define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT
diff --git a/generic/tkVisual.c b/generic/tkVisual.c
index 9f81693..b8cd42f 100644
--- a/generic/tkVisual.c
+++ b/generic/tkVisual.c
@@ -1,31 +1,31 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkVisual.c --
  *
- *	This file contains library procedures for allocating and
- *	freeing visuals and colormaps.  This code is based on a
- *	prototype implementation by Paul Mackerras.
+ *	This file contains library procedures for allocating and freeing
+ *	visuals and colormaps. This code is based on a prototype
+ *	implementation by Paul Mackerras.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkVisual.c,v 1.6 2004/05/23 17:27:55 dkf Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkVisual.c,v 1.7 2005/11/15 15:18:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkPort.h"
 
 /*
- * The table below maps from symbolic names for visual classes
- * to the associated X class symbols.
+ * The table below maps from symbolic names for visual classes to the
+ * associated X class symbols.
  */
 
 typedef struct VisualDictionary {
     char *name;			/* Textual name of class. */
-    int minLength;		/* Minimum # characters that must be
-				 * specified for an unambiguous match. */
+    int minLength;		/* Minimum # characters that must be specified
+				 * for an unambiguous match. */
     int class;			/* X symbol for class. */
 } VisualDictionary;
 static VisualDictionary visualNames[] = {
@@ -48,17 +48,16 @@ static VisualDictionary visualNames[] = {
 
 struct TkColormap {
     Colormap colormap;		/* X's identifier for the colormap. */
-    Visual *visual;		/* Visual for which colormap was
-				 * allocated. */
+    Visual *visual;		/* Visual for which colormap was allocated. */
     int refCount;		/* How many uses of the colormap are still
-				 * outstanding (calls to Tk_GetColormap
-				 * minus calls to Tk_FreeColormap). */
-    int shareable;		/* 0 means this colormap was allocated by
-				 * a call to Tk_GetColormap with "new",
-				 * implying that the window wants it all
-				 * for itself.  1 means that the colormap
-				 * was allocated as a default for a particular
-				 * visual, so it can be shared. */
+				 * outstanding (calls to Tk_GetColormap minus
+				 * calls to Tk_FreeColormap). */
+    int shareable;		/* 0 means this colormap was allocated by a
+				 * call to Tk_GetColormap with "new", implying
+				 * that the window wants it all for itself.  1
+				 * means that the colormap was allocated as a
+				 * default for a particular visual, so it can
+				 * be shared. */
     struct TkColormap *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of colormaps for this display,
 				 * or NULL for end of list. */
 };
@@ -68,17 +67,17 @@ struct TkColormap {
  *
  * Tk_GetVisual --
  *
- *	Given a string identifying a particular kind of visual, this
- *	procedure returns a visual and depth that matches the specification.
+ *	Given a string identifying a particular kind of visual, this procedure
+ *	returns a visual and depth that matches the specification.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is normally a pointer to a visual.  If an
- *	error occurred in looking up the visual, NULL is returned and
- *	an error message is left in the interp's result.  The depth of the
- *	visual is returned to *depthPtr under normal returns.  If
- *	colormapPtr is non-NULL, then this procedure also finds a
- *	suitable colormap for use with the visual in tkwin, and it
- *	returns that colormap in *colormapPtr unless an error occurs.
+ *	The return value is normally a pointer to a visual. If an error
+ *	occurred in looking up the visual, NULL is returned and an error
+ *	message is left in the interp's result. The depth of the visual is
+ *	returned to *depthPtr under normal returns. If colormapPtr is
+ *	non-NULL, then this procedure also finds a suitable colormap for use
+ *	with the visual in tkwin, and it returns that colormap in *colormapPtr
+ *	unless an error occurs.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	A new colormap may be allocated.
@@ -87,19 +86,17 @@ struct TkColormap {
  */
 
 Visual *
-Tk_GetVisual(interp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter to use for error
-					 * reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window in which visual will be
-					 * used. */
-    CONST char *string;			/* String describing visual.  See
-					 * manual entry for details. */
-    int *depthPtr;			/* The depth of the returned visual
-					 * is stored here. */
-    Colormap *colormapPtr;		/* If non-NULL, then a suitable
-					 * colormap for visual is placed here.
-					 * This colormap must eventually be
-					 * freed by calling Tk_FreeColormap. */
+Tk_GetVisual(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which visual will be used. */
+    CONST char *string,		/* String describing visual. See manual entry
+				 * for details. */
+    int *depthPtr,		/* The depth of the returned visual is stored
+				 * here. */
+    Colormap *colormapPtr)	/* If non-NULL, then a suitable colormap for
+				 * visual is placed here. This colormap must
+				 * eventually be freed by calling
+				 * Tk_FreeColormap. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin2;
     XVisualInfo template, *visInfoList, *bestPtr;
@@ -112,17 +109,16 @@ Tk_GetVisual(interp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr)
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Parse string and set up a template for use in searching for
-     * an appropriate visual.
+     * Parse string and set up a template for use in searching for an
+     * appropriate visual.
      */
 
     c = string[0];
     if (c == '.') {
 	/*
-	 * The string must be a window name.  If the window is on the
-	 * same screen as tkwin, then just use its visual.  Otherwise
-	 * use the information about the visual as a template for the
-	 * search.
+	 * The string must be a window name. If the window is on the same
+	 * screen as tkwin, then just use its visual. Otherwise use the
+	 * information about the visual as a template for the search.
 	 */
 
 	tkwin2 = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
@@ -134,8 +130,8 @@ Tk_GetVisual(interp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr)
 	    *depthPtr = Tk_Depth(tkwin2);
 	    if (colormapPtr != NULL) {
 		/*
-		 * Use the colormap from the other window too (but be sure
-		 * to increment its reference count if it's one of the ones
+		 * Use the colormap from the other window too (but be sure to
+		 * increment its reference count if it's one of the ones
 		 * allocated here).
 		 */
 
@@ -181,15 +177,15 @@ Tk_GetVisual(interp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr)
 	if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, string, &visualId) == TCL_ERROR) {
 	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad X identifier for visual: \"",
-		    string, "\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    string, "\"", NULL);
 	    return NULL;
 	}
 	template.visualid = visualId;
 	mask = VisualIDMask;
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * Parse the string into a class name (or "best") optionally
-	 * followed by whitespace and a depth.
+	 * Parse the string into a class name (or "best") optionally followed
+	 * by whitespace and a depth.
 	 */
 
 	for (p = string; *p != 0; p++) {
@@ -209,11 +205,11 @@ Tk_GetVisual(interp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr)
 	}
 	if (template.class == -1) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown or ambiguous visual name \"",
-		    string, "\": class must be ", (char *) NULL);
+		    string, "\": class must be ", NULL);
 	    for (dictPtr = visualNames; dictPtr->name != NULL; dictPtr++) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, dictPtr->name, ", ", (char *) NULL);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, dictPtr->name, ", ", NULL);
 	    }
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "or default", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "or default", NULL);
 	    return NULL;
 	}
 	while (isspace(UCHAR(*p))) {
@@ -234,8 +230,8 @@ Tk_GetVisual(interp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Find all visuals that match the template we've just created,
-     * and return an error if there are none that match.
+     * Find all visuals that match the template we've just created, and return
+     * an error if there are none that match.
      */
 
     template.screen = Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin);
@@ -249,31 +245,37 @@ Tk_GetVisual(interp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Search through the visuals that were returned to find the best
-     * one.  The choice is based on the following criteria, in decreasing
-     * order of importance:
+     * Search through the visuals that were returned to find the best one.
+     * The choice is based on the following criteria, in decreasing order of
+     * importance:
      *
-     * 1. Depth: choose a visual with exactly the desired depth,
-     *	  else one with more bits than requested but as few bits
-     *	  as possible, else one with fewer bits but as many as
-     *    possible.
-     * 2. Class: some visual classes are more desirable than others;
-     *    pick the visual with the most desirable class.
-     * 3. Default: the default visual for the screen gets preference
-     *    over other visuals, all else being equal.
+     * 1. Depth: choose a visual with exactly the desired depth, else one with
+     *	  more bits than requested but as few bits as possible, else one with
+     *	  fewer bits but as many as possible.
+     * 2. Class: some visual classes are more desirable than others; pick the
+     *    visual with the most desirable class.
+     * 3. Default: the default visual for the screen gets preference over
+     *    other visuals, all else being equal.
      */
 
     bestPrio = 0;
     bestPtr = NULL;
     for (i = 0; i < numVisuals; i++) {
 	switch (visInfoList[i].class) {
-	    case DirectColor:	prio = 5; break;
-	    case GrayScale:	prio = 1; break;
-	    case PseudoColor:	prio = 7; break;
-	    case StaticColor:	prio = 3; break;
-	    case StaticGray:	prio = 1; break;
-	    case TrueColor:	prio = 5; break;
-	    default:		prio = 0; break;
+	case DirectColor:
+	    prio = 5; break;
+	case GrayScale:
+	    prio = 1; break;
+	case PseudoColor:
+	    prio = 7; break;
+	case StaticColor:
+	    prio = 3; break;
+	case StaticGray:
+	    prio = 1; break;
+	case TrueColor:
+	    prio = 5; break;
+	default:
+	    prio = 0; break;
 	}
 	if (visInfoList[i].visual
 		== DefaultVisualOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin))) {
@@ -297,7 +299,7 @@ Tk_GetVisual(interp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr)
 	}
 	continue;
 
-	newBest:
+    newBest:
 	bestPtr = &visInfoList[i];
 	bestPrio = prio;
     }
@@ -306,11 +308,10 @@ Tk_GetVisual(interp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr)
     XFree((char *) visInfoList);
 
     /*
-     * If we need to find a colormap for this visual, do it now.
-     * If the visual is the default visual for the screen, then
-     * use the default colormap.  Otherwise search for an existing
-     * colormap that's shareable.  If all else fails, create a new
-     * colormap.
+     * If we need to find a colormap for this visual, do it now. If the visual
+     * is the default visual for the screen, then use the default colormap.
+     * Otherwise search for an existing colormap that's shareable. If all else
+     * fails, create a new colormap.
      */
 
     if (colormapPtr != NULL) {
@@ -338,7 +339,7 @@ Tk_GetVisual(interp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr)
 	}
     }
 
-    done:
+  done:
     return visual;
 }
 
@@ -347,31 +348,28 @@ Tk_GetVisual(interp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr)
  *
  * Tk_GetColormap --
  *
- *	Given a string identifying a colormap, this procedure finds
- *	an appropriate colormap.
+ *	Given a string identifying a colormap, this procedure finds an
+ *	appropriate colormap.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is normally the X resource identifier for the
- *	colormap.  If an error occurs, None is returned and an error
- *	message is placed in the interp's result.
+ *	colormap. If an error occurs, None is returned and an error message is
+ *	placed in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A reference count is incremented for the colormap, so
- *	Tk_FreeColormap must eventually be called exactly once for
- *	each call to Tk_GetColormap.
+ *	A reference count is incremented for the colormap, so Tk_FreeColormap
+ *	must eventually be called exactly once for each call to
+ *	Tk_GetColormap.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Colormap
-Tk_GetColormap(interp, tkwin, string)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter to use for error
-					 * reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window where colormap will be
-					 * used. */
-    CONST char *string;			/* String that identifies colormap:
-					 * either "new" or the name of
-					 * another window. */
+Tk_GetColormap(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window where colormap will be used. */
+    CONST char *string)		/* String that identifies colormap: either
+				 * "new" or the name of another window. */
 {
     Colormap colormap;
     TkColormap *cmapPtr;
@@ -396,9 +394,9 @@ Tk_GetColormap(interp, tkwin, string)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Use a colormap from an existing window.  It must have the same
-     * visual as tkwin (which means, among other things, that the
-     * other window must be on the same screen).
+     * Use a colormap from an existing window. It must have the same visual as
+     * tkwin (which means, among other things, that the other window must be
+     * on the same screen).
      */
 
     other = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
@@ -407,12 +405,12 @@ Tk_GetColormap(interp, tkwin, string)
     }
     if (Tk_Screen(other) != Tk_Screen(tkwin)) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't use colormap for ", string,
-		": not on same screen", (char *) NULL);
+		": not on same screen", NULL);
 	return None;
     }
     if (Tk_Visual(other) != Tk_Visual(tkwin)) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't use colormap for ", string,
-		": incompatible visuals", (char *) NULL);
+		": incompatible visuals", NULL);
 	return None;
     }
     colormap = Tk_Colormap(other);
@@ -436,36 +434,35 @@ Tk_GetColormap(interp, tkwin, string)
  *
  * Tk_FreeColormap --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to release a colormap that was
- *	previously allocated by Tk_GetColormap.
+ *	This procedure is called to release a colormap that was previously
+ *	allocated by Tk_GetColormap.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The colormap's reference count is decremented.  If this was the
- *	last reference to the colormap, then the colormap is freed.
+ *	The colormap's reference count is decremented. If this was the last
+ *	reference to the colormap, then the colormap is freed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_FreeColormap(display, colormap)
-    Display *display;			/* Display for which colormap was
-					 * allocated. */
-    Colormap colormap;			/* Colormap that is no longer needed.
-					 * Must have been returned by previous
-					 * call to Tk_GetColormap, or
-					 * preserved by a previous call to
-					 * Tk_PreserveColormap. */
+Tk_FreeColormap(
+    Display *display,		/* Display for which colormap was
+				 * allocated. */
+    Colormap colormap)		/* Colormap that is no longer needed. Must
+				 * have been returned by previous call to
+				 * Tk_GetColormap, or preserved by a previous
+				 * call to Tk_PreserveColormap. */
 {
     TkDisplay *dispPtr;
     TkColormap *cmapPtr, *prevPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Find Tk's information about the display, then see if this
-     * colormap is a non-default one (if it's a default one, there
-     * won't be an entry for it in the display's list).
+     * Find Tk's information about the display, then see if this colormap is a
+     * non-default one (if it's a default one, there won't be an entry for it
+     * in the display's list).
      */
 
     dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
@@ -487,7 +484,7 @@ Tk_FreeColormap(display, colormap)
 	    }
 	    return;
 	}
-    } 
+    }
 }
 
 /*
@@ -495,36 +492,35 @@ Tk_FreeColormap(display, colormap)
  *
  * Tk_PreserveColormap --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to indicate to Tk that the specified
- *	colormap is being referenced from another location and should
- *	not be freed until all extra references are eliminated.  The
- *	colormap must have been returned by Tk_GetColormap.
+ *	This procedure is called to indicate to Tk that the specified colormap
+ *	is being referenced from another location and should not be freed
+ *	until all extra references are eliminated. The colormap must have been
+ *	returned by Tk_GetColormap.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The colormap's reference count is incremented, so
- *	Tk_FreeColormap must eventually be called exactly once for
- *	each call to Tk_PreserveColormap.
+ *	The colormap's reference count is incremented, so Tk_FreeColormap must
+ *	eventually be called exactly once for each call to
+ *	Tk_PreserveColormap.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_PreserveColormap(display, colormap)
-    Display *display;			/* Display for which colormap was
-					 * allocated. */
-    Colormap colormap;			/* Colormap that should be
-					 * preserved. */
+Tk_PreserveColormap(
+    Display *display,		/* Display for which colormap was
+				 * allocated. */
+    Colormap colormap)		/* Colormap that should be preserved. */
 {
     TkDisplay *dispPtr;
     TkColormap *cmapPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Find Tk's information about the display, then see if this
-     * colormap is a non-default one (if it's a default one, there
-     * won't be an entry for it in the display's list).
+     * Find Tk's information about the display, then see if this colormap is a
+     * non-default one (if it's a default one, there won't be an entry for it
+     * in the display's list).
      */
 
     dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
@@ -537,5 +533,13 @@ Tk_PreserveColormap(display, colormap)
 	    cmapPtr->refCount += 1;
 	    return;
 	}
-    } 
+    }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */